Mini.: Online Edition For Part No. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Contents
A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

MINI Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
MINI. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with
your MINI
The MINI team

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ MOBILITY
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 174 Refueling
page 236. 176 Fuel
178 Wheels and tires
193 Engine compartment
6 Information
195 Engine oil
AT A GLANCE 198 Coolant
14 Cockpit 200 Maintenance
18 Onboard monitor 202 Replacing components
26 Voice activation system 214 Breakdown assistance
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 220 Care
CONTROLS REFERENCE
34 Opening and closing 226 Technical data
49 Adjusting 231 Appendix
58 Transporting children safely 236 Everything from A to Z
62 Driving
75 Displays
94 Lights
99 Safety
115 Driving stability control systems
119 Driving comfort
136 Climate control
143 Interior equipment
145 Digital compass
151 Storage compartments
DRIVING TIPS
158 Things to remember when driving
161 Loading
164 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
Manual ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ activation system..
ular topic is by using the index. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in voice activation system.
the first chapter. Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline Action steps
Any updates made after the editorial deadline Action steps to be carried out are presented as
can be found in the appendix of the printed numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. the defined order.
User's manual for Navigation, 1. First action step.

Entertainment, Communication 2. Second action step.
The topics Navigation, Entertainment, Commu‐
nication and the short commands of the voice Enumerations
activation system can be retrieved on the Con‐ Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
trol Display via the Integrated Owner's Hand‐ ternative possibilities are presented as list with
book. bullet points.
▷ First possibility.
Additional sources of information
▷ Second possibility.
A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ Symbols on vehicle components
swer additional questions at any time.
Indicates that you should consult the
Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com information on a particular part or assembly.
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and op‐

Symbols in the Owner's Manual tions
Indicates precautions that must be followed This Owner's Manual describes all models and
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of all standard, country-specific and optional
personal injury and serious damage to the equipment that is offered in the model series.
vehicle. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
information. able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
6
Information
lected optional features or the country-specific ments applying in the country of first delivery
version. also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
This also applies to safety-related functions and to be operated in a different country it might
systems. be necessary to adapt your vehicle to poten‐
tially differing operating conditions and permit
The respectively applicable country provisions
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply
must be observed when using the respective
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
features and systems.
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
For any options and equipment not described ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ formation on warranty is available from a
mentary Owner's Handbooks. dealer’s service center.
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently from what is shown in the Maintenance and repairs
illustrations. Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
materials and high-performance electronics,
requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
Status of the Owner's The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Manual that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
MINI dealer’s service center.
Basic information If you choose to use another service facility, the
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a manufacturer of your vehicle recommends use
policy of constant development that is con‐ of a facility that performs work, e.g. mainte‐
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to nance and repair, according to MINI specifica‐
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ tions with properly trained personnel, referred
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ to in this Owner's Manual as "another qualified
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from service center or repair shop".
those in your vehicle. If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
Updates made after the editorial damage and related safety risks.
deadline
Any updates made after the editorial deadline Parts and accessories
can be found in the appendix of the printed The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. the use of parts and accessory products ap‐
proved by the manufacturer of the MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
Own safety their use and installation are available from a
MINI dealer's service center.
Manufacturer MINI parts and accessories were tested by the
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische manufacturer of the MINI for their safety and
Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG. suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants gen‐
Warranty uine MINI parts and accessories.
Your vehicle is technically configured for the The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
operating conditions and registration require‐ evaluate whether each individual product from
7
Information
another manufacturer can be used with MINI Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, designed to meet the particular operating con‐
even if a country-specific official approval was ditions and homologation requirements in your
issued. The manufacturer of your vehicle does country and continental region in order to de‐
not evaluate whether these products are suita‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
ble for MINI vehicles under all usage conditions. operated under those conditions. If you wish to
operate your vehicle in another country or re‐
California Proposition 65 Warning gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi‐
California laws require us to state the following cle to meet different prevailing operating con‐
warning: ditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable war‐
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
bile components and parts, including compo‐
or region. In such case, please contact Cus‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
tomer Relations for further information.
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth de‐
Maintenance
fects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
products of component wear contain or emit road safety, operational reliability and the New
chemicals known to the State of California to Vehicle Limited Warranty.
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ures:
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ▷ MINI Maintenance system
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
for US models
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
water. Canadian models
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
Service and warranty these specifications, this could result in serious
We recommend that you read this publication damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited War‐
lowing warranties: ranty.
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
Many electronic components on your vehicle
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
Detailed information about these warranties is and faults. This technical information generally
listed in the Service and Warranty Information records the state of a component, a module, a
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and system or the environment:
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
levels for instance.
8
Information
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
individual components, e.g., wheel rotation The EDR is designed to record data related to
speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, trans‐ vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
verse acceleration. period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
components, e.g., lights and brakes. such data as:
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ operating.
ing the stability control system. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. safety belts were fastened.
This data is purely technical in nature and is ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
routes traveled cannot be created from this
These data can help provide a better under‐
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
pair services, service processes, warranty
and injuries occur.
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
mation can be read out from the event and EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are re‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer, tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain age, and crash location, are recorded.
further information there if you need it. After However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
an error is corrected, the information in the ment, could combine the EDR data with the
fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
continuous basis. quired during a crash investigation.
With the vehicle in use there are situations To read data recorded by an EDR, special
where you can associate these technical data equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with enforcement, that have the special equipment,
the assistance of an expert. can read the information if they have access to
Additional functions that are contractually the vehicle or the EDR.
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
9
Information
Vehicle identification You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe‐
number rcar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can
also obtain other information about motor ve‐
hicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsaf‐
ety.
The vehicle identification number can be found
in the engine compartment.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe‐
rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
10
Information
11
WATCH ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and op‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
tions also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
specific and optional features offered with the sions must be observed when using the respec‐
series. It also describes features that are not tive features and systems.
All around the steering wheel
1 Power windows 44 Low beams 94

2 Exterior mirror operation 55
3 Central locking system 40 Automatic headlight control 95
4 Lights Corner-illuminating lights 96
Front fog lights 97 High-beam Assistant 96
Instrument lighting 97
Lights off
Daytime running lights 96
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Parking lights 94
14
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Camera-based cruise control on/ Cleaning windows 69

off 119
Cruise control on/off 124 Rear window wiper 69
Store speed 119, 124 Cleaning rear window 69
Pause, continue cruise con‐ 9 Steering wheel buttons, right

trol 119, 124
Voice activation 26
Set speed 119, 124
Telephone
Reduce distance 119
Confirm the selection 84

Increase distance 119
Move selection up 84

6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 67 Move selection down 84
High beams, head‐ Increase volume

light flasher 67
High-beam Assistant 96 Reduce volume
Roadside parking lights 95 10 Horn

11 Adjust the steering wheel 57
On-board computer 84 12 Unlock hood 194
7 Instrument cluster 75
8 Steering column stalk, right
Windshield wipers 68
Rain sensor 68
15
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Hazard warning system 214 Start/stop the engine and switch

the ignition on/off 62
Intelligent Safety 108 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

trol 129
2 Control Display 18 Head-up Display 89

3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 151 7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 71
5 Climate control 136 Manual transmission selector lever 71
6 PDC Park Distance Control 126 8 Controller with buttons 19
Rearview camera 129 9 Parking brake 66
Parking assistant 132 10 Driving Dynamics Control 117
Auto Start/Stop function 64
16
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
All around the roofliner
1 Emergency Request 4 Ambient light 98
2 Indicator lamp, front-seat pass. 5 Glass sunroof 46

airbag 101
3 Reading lights 98 6 Interior lights 98
17
AT A GLANCE Onboard monitor
Onboard monitor
Vehicle features and op‐ Control elements at a
tions glance
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Control elements
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐
tive features and systems.
The concept 1 Control Display
The onboard monitor combines the functions 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
of a multitude of switches. Thus, these func‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
tions can be operated from a central location.
WARNING Control Display
Operating the integrated information sys‐
Information
tem and communication devices while driving
can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care
control of the vehicle. There is risk of an acci‐ instructions.
dent. Only use the systems or devices when the ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
traffic situation allows. If necessary stop and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
use the systems and devices while the vehicle is be damaged.
stationary.◀ ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the controller.
18
Onboard monitor AT A GLANCE
Switch off 3. Move in four directions.
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Buttons on controller
Press button Function
Controller with navigation system MENU Open the main menu.

The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
TEL Opens the phone menu.
1. Turn.
BACK Displays the previous display.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.
19
2. Press.
The main menu is displayed.

All onboard monitor functions can be called up
3. Move in two directions.
via the main menu.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

item is highlighted.
Buttons on controller
MENU Open the main menu.
Audio Open audio menu last listened to,

switch between audio menus. 2. Press the controller.
TEL Opens the phone menu. Menu items in the Owner's Manual
BACK Open previous panel. In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
OPTION Opens the Options menu. "Settings".
Changing between panels

Operating concept After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
Opening the main menu ▷ Move the controller to the left.
Press button. Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing BACK
button. In this case, the current panel is not
closed.
20
▷ Move the controller to the right. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Opens new display on top of previous is displayed.
screen.

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that
additional panels can be opened. Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
Opening the Options menu box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
Press button.
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some functions of the onboard monitor can be
operated using the touchpad on the controller:
Selecting functions
On the Control Display:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is 1. "Settings"
displayed. 2. "Touchpad"
3. Select the desired function.
Options menu
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". tive map.
▷ Control options for the selected main ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
menu, e.g., for "Radio". letters and numbers.
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
Changing settings beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
1. Select a field. following:
21
▷ The system recognizes capital and lower Example: setting the

case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐ clock
sary to switch to the corresponding input
mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐ Setting the clock
ters are written the same way. Switching On the Control Display:
between cases, numbers and letters, refer
to page 25.
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on played.
the Control Display.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as highlighted, and then press the controller.
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. Possible input depends
on the set language. Where necessary, en‐
ter special characters via the controller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right to display "Time/Date".
in the lower area of the touchpad. 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Operating the interactive map 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
The interactive map in the navigation system lighted, and then press the controller.
can be moved via the touchpad.
Function Controls
Interactive map. Swipe into respective

direction.
Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the

teractive map. touchpad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and

Changing settings
press the controller.
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
22
Status information Symbol Meaning
SIM card is missing.

Status field
Enter PIN.
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
Entertainment symbols
▷ Current entertainment source. Symbol Meaning
▷ Sound output, on/off. DVD changer.
▷ Wireless network reception strength.
Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols
USB audio interface.
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning Additional symbols

HD Radio station is being received. Symbol Meaning
Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are turned off.
Telephone symbols
Split screen
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call. General information

Missed call. Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
Wireless network reception strength. from the on-board comupter.
Symbol flashes: network search. In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Wireless network is not available.
when you change to another menu.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Switching the split screen on and off
Roaming is active.
Text message was received.
Check the SIM card. 1. Press button.

2. "Split screen"
SIM card is blocked.
23
Selecting the display The function will work immediately. This

On the Control Display: means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen" Displaying the button assignment
Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
3. Move the controller until the split screen is
gloves or use objects.
selected.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen
screen.
content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
Programmable memory
2. "OK"
buttons
General information Deleting personal in the
The onboard monitor functions can be stored
on the programmable memory buttons and
vehicle
called up directly, e.g., radio stations, naviga‐
tion destinations, phone numbers and menu The concept
entries. Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. These
Settings are stored for the profile currently
personal data can be permanently deleted via
used.
the onboard monitor.
Saving a function
General information
1. Highlight function via the onboard monitor.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
2. Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds. ▷ Personal Profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
Running a function ▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
Press button. ▷ Travel and on-board comupter information.
24
▷ Music collection. Switching between cases, letters and

▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. numbers
▷ Phone book. Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies.
and numbers:
▷ Voice notes
Symbol Function
▷ Login accounts.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up.

Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Without navigation system
Deleting data Select symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display. Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically.
3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data
4. "Delete all personal data" stored in the vehicle.
5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input
6. "OK" for which data is available.
▷ Target search: names of locations may be
entered in languages available through
Entering letters and Control Display.
numbers
General information
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐

bers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete the letter

or number.
Press the controller for an extended

period: delete all letters or numbers.
25
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and op‐ Using voice activation
tions
Activating the voice activation system
specific and optional features offered with the 1. Press button on the steering wheel.
series. It also describes features that are not 2. Wait for the signal.
the selected options or country versions. This 3. Say the command.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ A command that is recognized by the voice
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ activation system is announced and dis‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ played in the instrument cluster.
tive features and systems. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
The concept the function via the onboard monitor.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice com‐ Terminating the voice activation
mands via the voice activation system. The system
system supports you with announcements Briefly press the button on the steering
during input. wheel or ›Cancel‹.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system.
Possible commands
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side. Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation sys‐ The available commands depend on the menu
tem. that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
There are short commands for many functions.
Requirements You may select lists such as phone lists via
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
actly as they show in the respective list.
also supported by the voice activation system
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
Having possible commands read aloud
fied.
You can have available commands read out
Set the language, refer to page 88.
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
26
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Executing functions using short Setting the voice dialog

commands
Execute functions on the main menu via short Set system to standard dialog or use a short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which version.
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Help dialog for the voice activation On the Control Display:
system
1. "Settings"
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
2. "Language/Units"
Additional commands for the help dialog:
3. "Speech type:"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options 4. Select setting.
and the most important commands for
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information Adjusting the volume
about the principle of operation for the Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
voice activation system is announced. structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
One example: open the
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
tone settings rently used.
Via the main menu

The commands of the menu items are spoken Information on Emer‐
just as they are selected via the controller.
gency Requests
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
needed. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
2. Press button on the steering wheel.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
3. ›Radio‹ of a phone connection.
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Environmental condi‐

The desired tone settings can also be started
tions
via a short command.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
needed.
sis, and speed.
2. Press button on the steering wheel. ▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
3. ›Tone‹
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
27
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle

while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE
Integrated Owner's Manual in the

vehicle
Vehicle features and op‐ Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tions tering terms selected from the index.
specific and optional features offered with the Select components
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 1. Press button.
the selected options or country versions. This 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ 4. Selecting desired range:
tive features and systems. ▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
Components of the Integrated Owner's

Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Leafing through the Owner's Manual
mation or possible access.
Page by page with link access
Quick Reference Guide Turn the controller until the next or previous
page is displayed.
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a Page by page without link access
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Scroll through the pages directly while skipping
played while driving. the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by images the controller to browse from page to page.
Image search provides information and de‐ Scroll back.
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminology
for a feature is not at hand.
29
AT A GLANCE Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Scroll forward. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐

played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
Programmable memory buttons
You may open the relevant information di‐
rectly. General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
Opening via the onboard monitor grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
To move directly from the application on the rectly.
Control Display to the options menu:
Storing
1. Press button or move the controller to 1. Select "Owner's Manual" via the onboard
the right repeatedly until the "Options" monitor.
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual" 2. Press and hold the desired button,
until a signal sounds.
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed Executing
Directly from the Check Control message on the Press button.
Control Display: The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
"Display Owner's Manual" mediately.
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller to

the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
30
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle AT A GLANCE
31
HANDLE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and op‐ Overview
tions
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlock the tailgate
Remote control/key 4 Panic mode
General information Integrated key

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key.
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 42.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 36. Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
The remote controls hold information on re‐ row 2.
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.
control, refer to page 200
Replacing the battery

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐
trol.
2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the
cover.
34
Opening and closing CONTROLS
The battery compartment is accessible. ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐

mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.
▷ Interference from radio transmissions
through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
3. Slide the key in the cover of the battery A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
compartment and raise the cover. tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine via emergency

detection of the remote control
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the

positive side facing up.
5. Insert lid and cover.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding
dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
fied service center or repair shop or
mote control, as shown, against the marked
take them to a collection point.
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
New remote controls pressing the brake.
New remote controls are available from a Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
dealer’s service center or another qualified Control message appears, hold the remote con‐
service center or repair shop. trol, as shown, against the marked area on the
steering column and press the Start/Stop but‐
Loss of the remote controls ton within 10 seconds while pressing the
The lost remote control can be blocked by a clutch.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Emergency detection of remote control

It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
35
Personal Profile ▷ Intelligent Safety.
The concept Profile management

Personal Profile provides three profiles, using Opening profiles
which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
Regardless of the remote control in use a differ‐
Every remote control has one of these profiles
ent profile may be activated.
assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐ 1. "Settings"
vated. All settings stored in the profile are auto‐
2. "Profiles"
matically applied.
3. Select a profile.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, are automatically applied.
if the vehicle has been used in the meantime ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
by a person with a different remote control. mote control being used at the time.
Changes to the settings are automatically saved ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
in the personal profile. ent remote control, this profile will apply to
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
be created. tiated anymore between the settings for
the two remote controls.
Adjusting
Renaming profiles
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are saved in the active profile. The scope A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
of storable settings is country- and equipment- file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
dependable. On the Control Display:
▷ Unlocking and locking. 1. "Settings"
▷ Lights. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Radio. The current profile is selected.
▷ Instrument cluster. 3. Open "Options".
▷ Programmable memory buttons. 4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display. Resetting profiles
▷ Climate control. The settings of the active profile are reset to
their default values.
▷ Navigation.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC.
▷ Rearview camera 1. "Settings"
▷ Head-up Display. 2. "Profiles"
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. The current profile is selected.
▷ Cruise control.
36
3. Open "Options". 3. "Guest"

4. "Reset current profile" 4. Adjust the settings.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
Exporting profiles assigned to the current remote control.
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported. Display profile list during start
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving The profile list can be displayed during each
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle start to select the desired profile.
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
1. "Settings"
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐
file function. 2. "Profiles"
Export is made via the USB port to a USB de‐ 3. Open "Options".
vice. 4. "Display user list at startup"
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup‐
ported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recom‐
mended formats for profile export. Other for‐ Using the remote con‐
mats may not support the export.
trol
1. "Settings"
2. "Profiles" Information
3. "Export profile" WARNING
4. "USB device" People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
Importing profiles in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
ported via the USB interface. remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐
ported profile.
Unlocking
1. "Settings"
Press button on the remote control.
2. "Profiles"
3. "Import profile" ▷ The vehicle is unlocked.
4. "USB device" ▷ The interior lights are switched on, when it
is dark outside, the courtesy lamps are also
Using the guest profile switched on. This function is not available, if
The guest profile is for individual settings that the interior lamps were switched off man‐
are saved in none of the three personal profiles. ually.
This can be useful for drivers who are using the ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
vehicle temporarily and do not have their own function was activated.
profile.
On 3-door models:
1. "Settings" Press button on the remote control
2. "Profiles" twice in direct succession.
37
When the door is opened, the window is low‐ if the interior lamps were switched off man‐
ered more to make it easier to enter the vehi‐ ually.
cle. If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of
when the vehicle was locked Interior motion
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft
Create the settings, refer to page 42.
warning system, refer to page 44, are turned
The alarm system, refer to page 43, is dis‐ off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before press‐
armed. ing the button again.
Convenient opening Panic mode

Press and hold this button on the re‐ You can trigger the alarm system if you find
mote control after unlocking. yourself in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, Press button on the remote control for
as long as the button on the remote control is at least 3 seconds.
pressed.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Locking
Unlocking the tailgate
WARNING
Press button on the remote control for
Unlocking from the inside is only possible approx. 1 second.
with special knowledge.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐ The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is whether the vehicle was previously locked or
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the unlocked.
vehicle from the outside when there are people To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
in it.◀ the remote control in the cargo area.
The driver's door must be closed. Depending on the features and the country
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
Press button on the remote control. locked. Create the settings, refer to page 42.
If the doors were not unlocked, the tailgate is
The alarm system, refer to page 43, is armed. locked again as soon as it closes.
If the vehicle horn honks twice when you lock
CAUTION
the car, this means that the engine or ignition is
still switched on. In this case, the engine or ig‐ Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
nition must be switched off by means of the the rear window and heat conductors while
Start/Stop button. driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
Switching on interior lights and not hit the rear window.◀
courtesy lights
Press button on the remote control Malfunction
with the vehicle locked. Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
The courtesy lamps are only switched on when lowing circumstances:
it is dark outside. This function is not available,
38
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ Without remote control

charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 34.
From the outside
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
WARNING
transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmit power. Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects. If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
mobile phones or other electronic devices
vehicle from the outside when there are people
in direct proximity.
in it.◀
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects or electronic devices. CAUTION
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock The door lock is permanently joined with
the vehicle using the integrated key, refer to the door. The door handle can be moved.
page 39. When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
For US owners only damaged. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
The transmitter and receiver units comply with move the integrated key before pulling the
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication outside door handle.◀
Commission regulations. Operation is governed
by the following:
FCC ID:
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement: Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two The other doors must be unlocked or locked
conditions: from the inside.
▷ This device may not cause harmful interfer‐ To do this, unlock the lid from below with the
ence, and integrated key, arrow, and remove.
▷ this device must accept any interference re‐

Alarm system
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is
locked with the integrated key.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to The alarm system is triggered when the door is
operate this equipment. opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the
door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, un‐
lock vehicle with the remote control or switch
39
on the ignition, if needed, through emergency CAUTION

detection of the remote control. The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is risk of property damage. Make
From the inside sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Locking and unlocking
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
CAUTION
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is risk of property damage. Cover
Press button. the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
Vehicle is locked. not hit the rear window.◀
Press button. Opening from the outside

The vehicle is unlocked. When the tailgate is opened, make sure there is
Pressing the buttons for the central locking sys‐ sufficient clearance to prevent damage.
tem locks and unlocks the doors and the tail‐
gate when the front doors are closed, but they
are not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening

Either unlock the doors together using the cen‐ ▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on
tral locking system buttons and then pull the the tailgate.
door handle above the armrest or pull the door ▷ Press button on the remote control
handle on the door to open the door. The other for approx. 1 second.
doors remain locked. As the case may be, the doors are also un‐
locked. Unlocking with the remote control,
refer to page 38.
Tailgate The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
40
Opening from the inside Functional requirements

With the vehicle is stationary, press the ▷ There are no sources of interference
button in the driver's footwell. nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
Closing
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.
Unlocking
Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate

can be used to conveniently pull down the tail‐
gate.
Comfort Access
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
The concept dle, press the button.
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control. This corresponds to pressing the remote control
button:
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
Locking
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Separate unlocking of the tailgate.
▷ Start the engine.
On the driver's or front passenger's door han‐
Information dle, press the button.
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not place This corresponds to pressing the remote control
the remote control in the cargo area. button:
41
To save battery power, ensure that all power ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
consumers are turned off before locking the ve‐ transmission towers or other equipment
hicle. with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
Convenient closing metal objects.
WARNING ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
With convenient closing, body parts can mobile phones or other electronic devices
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure in direct proximity.
that the area of movement of the doors is clear Do not transport the remote control together
during convenient closing.◀ with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 39.
Adjusting
Unlocking
Press and hold down the handle of the driver or The settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐
the front seat passenger. sonal Profile, refer to page 36.
This corresponds to pressing the remote control Doors

button:
1. "Settings"
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
2. "Doors/key"
sunroof will be closed.
3. Select the symbol.
Unlocking the tailgate separately 4. Select the desired function.
Press button on tailgate's exterior. ▷ "Driver's door only"
This corresponds to pressing the remote control Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
button: flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
The situation of the doors does not change. locks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
Malfunction The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ Tailgate
lowing circumstances: Depending on optional features and country
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ version, this setting is not offered in some
charged. Replace the battery, refer to cases.
page 34.
1. "Settings"
2. "Doors/key"
42
3. Select the symbol. ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the tailgate.

4. Select the desired function. ▷ Movements in the vehicle interior.
▷ "Tailgate" ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
Only the tailgate is unlocked. tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked. The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Locking ▷ By switching on the hazard warning system.
The settings are saved in the active profile. Per‐ ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
sonal Profile, refer to page 36.
1. "Settings" Arming and disarming the alarm system

2. "Doors/key" When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
3. Select desired setting.
cess, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at
▷ "Lock if no door is opened" the same time.
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is Door lock and armed alarm system
opened. The alarm system is triggered when the door is
▷ "Lock after start driving" opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
The vehicle locks automatically after door lock.
you drive off. Switch off the alarm, refer to page 44.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle Tailgate in case of armed alarm system
1. "Settings" The tailgate can be opened even when the
2. "Doors/key" alarm system is armed.
3. Select desired setting. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and

monitored again when the doors are locked.
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" The hazard warning system flashes once.
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn. Panic mode
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" You can trigger the alarm system if you find
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, yourself in a dangerous situation.
locking by one. Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
Alarm system To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The concept
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
43
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview Avoiding unintentional alarms

mirror The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can be switched off together, such as in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
interior motion sensor
2 seconds:
The alarm system is armed. Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi‐
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
cle is locked.
Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
closed. Correctly closed access points are
onds and then continues to flash.
secured.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes
are turned off until the vehicle is locked again.
continuously. Interior motion sensor and tilt
alarm sensor are not active.
When the still open access is closed, interior Switching off the alarm
motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
switched on. switch on the ignition, if needed through
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ emergency detection of remote control, re‐
ing: fer to page 35.
The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ For Comfort Access: If you have the remote
control with you, unlock vehicle using the
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking button on the driver's side or passenger
until the engine ignition is switched on, but side door.
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Power windows
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. Information
The alarm system responds in situations such as WARNING
attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is Unattended children or animals can move
towed. the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
Interior motion sensor ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The windows and glass sunroof must be closed
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
for the system to function properly.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
44
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral. Closing

▷ Using vehicle equipment. WARNING
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not When operating the windows, body parts
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
and lock the vehicle.◀ that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
On 5-door models
The window closes while the switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance

point.
The window closes automatically. Pulling
again stops the motion.
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
refer to page 42.
Pinch protection system

On 3-door models WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
that the area of movement of the windows is
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the area
Opening of movement of the windows.◀
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a

▷ Press the button to the resistance window closes, closing is interrupted.
point.
The window reopens slightly.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Closing without the pinch protection
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ system
ance point.
WARNING
The window opens automatically. Pressing
When operating the windows, body parts
again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 38, juries or risk of property damage. Make sure
via remote control.
45
that the area of movement of the windows is Overview

In case of danger from the outside or if ice

might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and

hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the win‐
dow reopens slightly if the closing force ex‐
ceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance point Switching on and off
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it Press button.
there.
The LED lights up if the safety function
The window closes without jam protection. is switched on.
On 5-door models: safety switch
The concept Panoramic glass sun‐

The opening and closing of the rear window roof
can be blocked via the safety switch for the
rear. This makes sense, for example, if children Information
or animals are carried in the rear.
WARNING
Information Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make
WARNING
sure that the area of movement of the glass
When operating the windows, body parts sunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure WARNING
that the area of movement of the windows is Unattended children or animals can move
clear during opening and closing.◀ the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the fic, e.g. with the following actions:
windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
dren or animals are carried in the rear. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
46
Overview Comfort position

If the glass sunroof stops before it is completely
opened, it is in the Comfort position. In this po‐
sition the wind noises in the interior are the
least.
If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
the switch.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open

Tilting the glass sunroof ▷ Slide switch forward to the
Press back the switch up to or resistance point and hold.
beyond the resistance point and The glass sunroof is closed as
release it. long as the switch is pressed
The glass sunroof is raised. and stops in the raised posi‐
tion.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
Opening glass sunroof ance point and release it.
When the glass sunroof is closed The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the
raised position.
Press the switch back beyond
Pressing the switch toward the back stops
the resistance point and release
the motion.
it twice.
▷ Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐
The glass sunroof is opened.
ance point and release it twice.
Pressing the switch again stops
The glass sunroof is closed.
the motion.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely With the glass sunroof completely
raised raised
▷ Slide switch back to the re‐
Press the switch forward beyond
sistance point and hold.
the resistance point and release
The glass sunroof is opened it.
as long as the switch is
The glass sunroof is closed.
pressed.
▷ Press the switch back beyond the resist‐
ance point and release it. Pinch protection system
The glass sunroof is opened. If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
Pressing the switch again stops the motion. glass sunroof closes, the closing action is inter‐
rupted.
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
47
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing without the pinch protection

system
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
1. Press the switch forward beyond the resist‐

ance point and hold it.
The pinch protection is limited and the
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure, it can happen that the
glass sunroof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI recom‐
mends having this work performed by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
48
Adjusting CONTROLS
Adjusting
Vehicle features and op‐ There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
tions backrest in an as upright position as possible
This chapter describes all standard, country- and do not adjust again while driving.◀
specific and optional features offered with the WARNING
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to There is risk of jamming when moving the
the selected options or country versions. This seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ damage. Make sure that the area of movement
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
tive features and systems. Adjusting seats
Overview
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital con‐
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 51.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 53.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 99.
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
Seats 3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
49
CONTROLS Adjusting
Forward/backward Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine
are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired

direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
or back slightly making sure it engages prop‐
erly. Turn the wheel in order to increase or decrease
the curvature.
Height
Thigh support
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Backrest tilt
In 3-door models: entering the rear
Information
WARNING
There is risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the WARNING

backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to an unlocked
backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
50
Adjusting CONTROLS
risk of injuries. Fold back and lock the backrests Switching on

before driving.◀
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
Fold down seat back The maximum temperature is reached when
1. Pull lever up to the stop. three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐
ically with the temperature selected last.
When Green mode, refer to page 165, is acti‐
vated, the heater output is reduced.
Switch off
Press button longer.
2. Fold backrest forward. The LEDs go out.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
Safety belts
The driver's seat features a mechanical mem‐
ory function for forward/back and backrest ad‐ Seats with safety belt
justment.
The vehicle has four or five seating positions,
1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐ each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
tion.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat. General information
If the backrest is folded back when the seat is Always make sure that safety belts are being
not yet in the original position, the seat latches worn by all occupants before driving off.
in the current position. In this case, manually For the occupants' safety the belt locking
adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 50. mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt
out of the holder when applying it.
Front seat heating If needed, disengage the belt in the rear from
the belt buckle on the side.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated
into the rear seat, are for passengers sitting on
the left and right.
The center rear safety belt buckle is solely in‐
tended for the center passenger.
51
CONTROLS Adjusting
Information Buckling the belt

WARNING
General information
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt. In‐
fants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and respec‐
tively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀
WARNING Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in

The protective effect of the safety belts the belt buckle.
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the
Unbuckling the belt
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ 1. Hold the belt firmly.
sive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or dan‐ 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
ger to life. Make sure that all occupants are 3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
wearing safety belts correctly.◀ nism.
WARNING
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
and front passenger seat
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀ belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be acti‐
Correct use of safety belts vated if objects are placed on the front passen‐
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to your ger seat.
body as possible over your lap and should‐
ers. Damage to safety belts
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your WARNING
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐
The protective effect of the safety belts
ach.
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it ing situations:
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
hard or fragile objects.
changed in any other way.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward soiled.
around your upper body.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
52
Adjusting CONTROLS
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in Height

the event of an accident. There is risk of injuries Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, approximately at ear level.
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have Distance
the safety belts checked after an accident at
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
as close as possible to the back of the head.
service center or repair shop.◀
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting
the tilt of the backrest.
Front head restraints Adjusting the height
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints
on occupied seats prior to driving and make
sure that the center of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head at eye level.◀ ▷ To raise: pull.
WARNING ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
headrest down.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Removing
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
Correctly adjusted head restraint 1. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.

2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
General information straint out completely.
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rear‐
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event ward if it is in the upright position.
of an accident. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
Adjust the headrest via the backrest tilt as sitting in the seat in question.
needed.
53
CONTROLS Adjusting
Rear head restraints Adjusting the height
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head restraints
can cause injuries in the head and neck area.
There is risk of injuries. Install head restraints
on occupied seats prior to driving and make
sure that the center of the head restraint sup‐
ports the back of the head at eye level.◀ ▷ To raise: push.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
WARNING headrest down.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
Folding down
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been deter‐
mined to be safe for attachment to a head
restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀
▷ To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1,
Correctly adjusted head restraint and press down the head restraint, arrow 2.
▷ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.
General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event Removing
of an accident. Fold the seat down, refer to page 149, before
removing the head restraint, otherwise the
Height head restraint cannot be removed.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
54
Adjusting CONTROLS
Overview
1. Pull head restraint up against the resist‐

ance.
1 Adjusting 55
2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
straint out completely.
3 Fold in and out 56
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Mirrors Slide the switch.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting electrically
General information The setting corresponds to the direction
The mirror on the passenger side is more in which the button is pressed.
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ Adjusting manually
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mirror.
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
trieved if this function is active.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Information
The concept
WARNING
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer the front passenger side is tilted downward.
than they appear. The distance to the traffic This improves your view of the curb and other
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g. low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind Activating
by looking over your shoulder.◀
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
55
CONTROLS Adjusting
Deactivating Interior rearview mirror, manually

Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror dimmable
position.
Flip lever
Fold in and out
CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀
Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx. To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear
15 mph/20 km/h. view mirror, flip the lever forward.
Beneficial in the following situations:
▷ In car washes. Turn knob
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
whenever the engine is running.
the interior mirror.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ Interior rearview mirror, automatic
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior dimming feature
rearview mirror, refer to page 56.
The concept
Photocells are used for control:
56
Adjusting CONTROLS
▷ In the mirror glass.

▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Adjusting

2. Fold the lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
4. Fold the lever back.
5. Switch off the ignition again if needed.
57
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Information Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
WARNING
Only transport children younger than 13 years
Unattended children or animals can move
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
child restraint systems provided in accordance
fic, e.g. with the following actions:
with the age, weight and size of the child.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
▷ Releasing the parking brake. safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows. system can no longer be used due to their age,
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral. weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
and lock the vehicle.◀
side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
Children should always be in the rear page 101.
WARNING
Information
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable WARNING
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐ Active front-seat passenger airbags can
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost injure a child in a child restraint system when
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause addi‐ ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
tional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
or during braking and evasive maneuvers. GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
restraint systems.◀
58
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
WARNING knee and side airbags on the front passenger

The stability of the child restraint system side are deactivated.
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
adjustment or improper installation of the child tomatically, refer to page 101.
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
WARNING
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust Active front-seat passenger airbags can
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and injure a child in a child restraint system when
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible, ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐ airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
move them.◀ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Seat position and height

Installing child re‐ Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
straint systems and adjust its height to the highest and thus
best possible position for the belt and to offer
Information optimal protection in the event of an accident.
Pay attention to the specifications of the child If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
installing, and using child restraint systems. move the passenger seat carefully forward until
WARNING the best possible belt guide position is reached.
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
Child seat security
adjustment or improper installation of the child
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged. If possible,
adjust the height of the head restraints or re‐
move them.◀
In order to faciliate the installation of a back- The rear safety belts and the front passenger
facing child restraint system in the rear: safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Move the front passenger's seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
Locking the safety belt
On the front passenger seat 1. Pull out the strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
Deactivating airbags
belt.
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
59
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it 2. Remove the child restraint system.
tight against the child restraint system. The 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. tem on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat
belt instead for the middle seat.
Information
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ Before installing LATCH child restraint
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ systems
turer when installing and using LATCH child re‐
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
straint fixing system.
straint system.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

Assembly of LATCH child restraint
The lower anchors may be used to attach the systems
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
and CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is re‐
turer's information.
strained by the internal harnesses.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
Information erly connected.
WARNING Child restraint fixing system with a

If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems tether strap
are not correctly engaged, the protective effect
of the LATCH child restraint fixing system can Information
be limited. There is risk of injuries or danger to
CAUTION
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ The mounting points for the upper retain‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the ing straps of child restraint systems are only
backrest.◀ provided for these retaining straps. When other
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐
aged. There is risk of property damage. Only
Position mount child restraint systems to the upper re‐
The corresponding symbol shows the taining straps.◀
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are Mounting points
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the The respective symbol shows the an‐
inner lower anchors of standard outer chor for the upper retaining strap. Seats
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint sys‐ with an upper Top Tether are marked
60
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
with this symbol. It can be found on the rear tem on the front passenger seat. There is risk of
seat backrest or the rear window shelf. injuries or danger to life. With a mounted child
restraint system, do not carry any people on
the rear seat behind the front passenger seat.◀
Retaining strap guide
WARNING WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐ tective effect of the child restraint system is lim‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐ ited or there is none. In particular situations,
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is e.g. braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
not guided across sharp edges and without dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀ is risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked.◀
ON 5-door models: Lock‐

ing the doors and win‐
dows
Doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
the mounting point The door can now be opened from the outside
1. Raise the head restraint if needed. only.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint. Safety switch for the rear
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
Press button on the driver's door if
the anchor on the back seat.
children are being transported in the
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it rear.
down.
This locks various functions so that they cannot
WARNING
be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer
In case of an accident, people sitting in to page 46.
the back can come into contact with the tight‐
ened retaining strap of the child restraint sys‐
61
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and op‐ To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
tions electronic systems/power consumers.
specific and optional features offered with the Ignition off
series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
the selected options or country versions. This Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ position P, press the Start/Stop button again
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ without stepping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
Start/Stop button electronic systems/power consumers.
The concept The ignition is switched off automatically in the

following situations while the vehicle is station‐
Pressing the Start/Stop button ary and the engine is off:
switches the ignition on or off
▷ During locking, also with the low beams ac‐
and starts the engine.
tivated.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
gine starts in selector lever posi‐
completely, so that the engine can still be
tion P or N with the brake pedal pressed when
started. This function is only available when
you press the Start/Stop button.
the low beams are turned off.
Manual transmission: the engine starts with the
▷ When opening and closing the driver door,
clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop but‐
if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
ton is pressed.
the low beams are turned off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
Ignition on with driver's door open and low beams off.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop ▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at ter approx. 15 minutes of no use.
the same time.
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop but‐ Radio ready state
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. Activate radio-ready state: when the engine is
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. running: press the Start/Stop button.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
instrument cluster light up for a varied length of main ready for operation.
time. The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally in the following situations:
62
Driving CONTROLS
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the

▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central front wheels in the direction of the curb.
locking system. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
completely, so that the engine can still be CAUTION
started.
In the case of repeated starting attempts
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., the or repeated starting in quick succession, the
ignition is automatically switched off for the fol‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
lowing reasons: The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ing in quick succession.◀
▷ When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights. Steptronic transmission
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
Starting the engine
switched on, the system automatically switches
to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned 1. Depress the brake pedal.
off or, if correspondingly equipped, the day‐ 2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
time running lights are activated. 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
Starting the engine starts.
Information Manual transmission

DANGER
Starting the engine
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can 1. Depress the brake pedal.
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ 2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐ tral.
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
The ignition is activated automatically for a cer‐
vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
tain time and is stopped as soon as the engine
haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
starts.
tion.◀
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into Engine stop
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against Information
rolling. WARNING
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Unattended children or animals can move
against rolling away, observe the following: the vehicle and endanger themselves and traf‐
▷ Set the parking brake. fic, e.g. with the following actions:
63
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Manual transmission

▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Switching off the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting 2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
and lock the vehicle.◀ 3. Set the parking brake.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into Auto Start/Stop function
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against The concept
rolling.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured The system switches off the engine during a
against rolling away, observe the following: stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
▷ Set the parking brake. lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the engine starts again automatically for driving off.
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
Automatic operation
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀ After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
Before driving into a car wash the last selected state, refer to page 66. When
the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is avail‐
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐
able when the vehicle is traveling faster than
serve instructions for going into an automatic
about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
car wash, refer to page 220.
Engine stop
Steptronic transmission
The engine is switched off automatically during
Switching off the engine a stop under the following conditions:
1. Engage selector lever position P with the Manual transmission:
vehicle stopped. ▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
2. Press the Start/Stop button. not pressed.
The engine is switched off. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
Steptronic transmission:
3. Set the parking brake.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
64
Driving CONTROLS
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the ▷ The parking assistant is activated.
driver's door is closed. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal, ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N
engage lever in position P. The engine remains or M/S.
off.
To continue driving depress the brake pedal. Starting the engine
When a gear is engaged, the engine starts au‐ The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
tomatically. lowing conditions:
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced ▷ Manual transmission:
when the engine is switched off.
The clutch pedal is pressed.
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Steptronic transmission:
The display indicates that the By releasing the brake pedal.

Auto Start/Stop function is ready After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
for an Automatic engine start.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
The display indicates that the will not start again automatically if any one of
conditions for an automatic en‐ the following conditions are met:
gine stop have not been met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
Functional limitations
length of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations: The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
▷ External temperature too low.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ Functional limitations
matic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
or cooled to the required level. lowing situations:
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐ ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
ture. when the cooling function is switched on.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ The steering wheel is turned.
steering wheel is being turned. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
▷ After driving in reverse. tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
matic climate control is switched on. tor lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low. ▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. matic climate control is switched on.
65
CONTROLS Driving
▷ The vehicle battery charge is very low. 3. Manual transmission: shift into first gear or
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when reverse.
the heating is switched on. 4. Set the parking brake.
▷ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
pressure; this can occur, e.g., if the brake
pedal is depressed a number of times in Automatic deactivation
succession. In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated automatically for safety reasons as
Switching the system on/off if the driver were absent.
Using the button Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked.
Parking brake
Applying
Press button. The lever automatically engages after being
pulled up.
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is The indicator lamp lights up red. The
deactivated. parking brake is set.
The engine is started during an automatic Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
engine stop. models
The engine can only be stopped or started
via the Start/Stop button. If for once use during driving is required, en‐
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
activated. button down.
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
Switching off the vehicle during an tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
automatic engine stop while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle The brake lights will not light up if the parking
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when brake is set.
leaving it.
1. Steptronic transmission: engage selector

lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
66
Driving CONTROLS
Releasing Triple turn signal activation

Slightly tap lever.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide Settings are stored for the profile currently
the lever down. used.
Signaling briefly
Turn signal, high beams, Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
headlight flasher to flash.
Turn signal Malfunction

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
Turn signal in exterior mirror indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in High beams, headlight flasher
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐
sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to
the resistance point.
67
CONTROLS Driving
Washer/wiper system ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once

beyond the resistance point.
Switching the wipers on/off and brief Wipers change to normal speed when vehi‐
wipe cle comes to standstill.
General information Switch off and brief wipe

Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Information
CAUTION
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor overheat on switching on. There is risk of
property damage. Defrost the windshield prior The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
to switching the wipers on.◀ sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
WARNING
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
If the wipers start moving in the folded press down once.
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
down twice.
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
Interval mode or rain sensor
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀
The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
Switching on
wiper operation is preset.
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
68
Driving CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating Washing the windshield
Press button on the wiper lever. Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped with The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated. WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
CAUTION dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
can accidentally start moving in car washes. washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
CAUTION
When the wiper water container is empty,
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the wash pump cannot work as intended.
the rain sensor There is risk of property damage. Do not use
the washer system when the wash water con‐
tainer is empty.◀
Rear window wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency

or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Turn the switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐
row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐
69
CONTROLS Driving
gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐ Washer fluid

eration.
Information
Cleaning rear window WARNING
In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐
Some antifreeze agents can contain
row 2. The switch automatically returns to its
harmful substances and are flammable. There
interval position when released.
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the in‐
In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
The switch automatically returns to its idle posi‐ away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
tion when released. ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
Fold-out position of the wipers United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or un‐ regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
der frosty conditions, e.g. states; do not exceed the allowable washer
WARNING fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
If the wipers start moving in the folded
tainer.
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
risk of injuries or risk of property damage. Make or the equivalent is recommended.◀
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
WARNING
wipers are in the folded away state and the
wipers are folded in when switching on.◀ Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a
1. Switch the ignition on and off again. safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades property damage. Have work under the hood
are not frozen to the windshield. be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly Washer fluid reservoir
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.

2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐

voir in the engine compartment.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
centrate and tap water and – if required – with
70
Driving CONTROLS
a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ N Neutral:

turer's recommendations. The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the washes, e.g.
right mixture.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and P Park
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
water; this could damage the wiper system. drive wheels are blocked.
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
ferent manufacturers because they can clog the lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
windshield washer nozzles. hicle may begin to move.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US
gal/1 liter. Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal be‐
Manual transmission yond the resistance point at the full throttle po‐
sition.
Shifting
Engaging selector lever positions
CAUTION
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
speeds can damage the engine. There is risk of pedal until you are ready to start.
property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.◀
lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
Reverse gear
With the vehicle is stationary, press on the
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever
To overcome the resistance push the selector position P or N; otherwise, the selector lever is
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐ blocked: shift lock.
verse gear. A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R or the inadvertent
change from selector lever position P.
Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R is Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
71
CONTROLS Driving
Canceling the lock If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐

mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.
Switching to manual mode

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
Press button on the front of the selector lever, wards.
arrow. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
Sport program and manual mode M/S not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
Activating the sport program strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic

upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained, M/S
manual mode is automatically upshifted as
needed.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmission,
automatic shift operations are not performed if
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ one of the following conditions is met:
tor lever position D. ▷ DSC is deactivated.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ▷ TRACTION is activated.
ment cluster, e.g., S1. In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ With the respective transmission version, the
vated. lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
taneously operating the kickdown and the left
Activating the M/S manual mode shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐ duced via the shift paddles when switching
lector lever position D. briefly from D to manual mode.
2. Push the selector lever forward or back‐

Ending the sport program/manual
ward.
mode
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is Push the selector lever to the right.
changed.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
72
Driving CONTROLS
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport Displays in the instrument cluster

transmission The selector lever position is dis‐
played, e.g.: P.
Manually release the transmission lock

Should the selector lever be blocked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being
turned on, the brake being depressed and the
unlock button being pressed, the transmission
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow lock can be manually canceled:
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
Before unlocking the transmission lock man‐
hands on the steering wheel.
ually, engage the parking brake forcefully to
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
1. Loosen the sleeve of the selector lever.
▷ With the respective transmission version,
2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Un‐
the lowest possible gear can be selected by
plug the cable connector if needed.
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard ve‐
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
hicle tool kit, refer to page 202, press the
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
yellow release lever downward, arrow.
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever posi‐
tion D with the respective transmission version,
it is possible to switch back into the automatic
4. Move the selector lever slightly toward the
mode:
rear; to do this press the unlock button on
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. the front of the selector lever.
or Release the release lever.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired po‐
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. sition.
In the manual mode, after conservative driving
for a certain amount of time or if there has
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift
paddles within a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic mode.
73
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic Sport transmission: Launch A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument

Control cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
The concept 3 seconds, release the brake.
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
on surfaces with good traction. mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 158, period.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, re‐
fer to page 115.
Requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT with

Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 117.
The instrument cluster displays TRACTION
in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF
indicator lamp lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the
resistance point at the full throttle position,
kickdown.
74
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Instrument cluster
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Tachometer 80 4 Fuel gauge 80

2 Messages, e.g. Check Control 5 Display/reset miles 80
3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 76
75
CONTROLS Displays
Electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems On-board computer 84

Messages, e.g. Check Control 2 Selector lever position display 71
Time 80 Gear shift indicator 82
External temperature 80 3 Driving Dynamics Control 117
Selection lists 84 Status
Total miles/trip odometer 80
Check Control Indicator/warning lights
The concept General information

The indicator and warning lights can light up in
The Check Control system monitors functions in
a variety of combinations and colors.
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems. Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and in the
Head-up Display. Red lights
In addition, an acoustic signal may be output Safety belt reminder
and a text message may appear on the Control
Display. Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not buck‐
led. The safety belt reminder can also
76
Displays CONTROLS
be activated if objects are placed on the front Orange lights

passenger seat.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned Active Cruise Control
correctly. The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving ahead.
Airbag system For more information, see Camera-
based cruise control, refer to page 119.
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐
service center or repair shop. tected.
Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐
Parking brake, brake system quate for operating the system.
The parking brake is set. The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
For additional information, refer to Re‐
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
lease parking brake, refer to page 67.
pedal.
Yellow lights
Front-end collision warning
Illuminated: advance warning is issued, Anti-lock Braking System ABS
e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ Avoid sudden braking as much as possi‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the ble. Braking force boost may not be
vehicle ahead is too small. working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐
Increase distance. count the longer brake distance. Have
checked immediately by a dealer’s
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
service center or another qualified serv‐
ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
ice center or repair shop.
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive DSC Dynamic Stability Control
maneuver. Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized.
Pedestrian warning Reduce speed and adapt driving style to
the driving circumstances.
If a collision with a person detected in
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
up and a signal sounds.
other qualified service center or repair shop.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 115.
77
CONTROLS Displays
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated For additional information, refer to Tire Pres‐
or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated sure Monitor, refer to page 102.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ Steering system
trol DTC is switched on.
Steering system in some cases not
For additional information, refer to Dynamic working.
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 115, and
Have steering system checked immedi‐
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
ately by a dealer’s service center or another
page 116.
qualified service center or repair shop.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Engine functions
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Have vehicle checked immediately by a
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. fied service center or repair shop.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
For additional information, refer to On-board
For additional information, refer to Flat Tire Diagnostics socket, refer to page 201.
Monitor, refer to page 106.
Green lights
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor Turn signal
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in Turn signal switched on.
a tire.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. has failed.
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no For additional information, refer to Turn signal,
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be refer to page 67.
detected.
▷ Interference through systems or devices Parking lights, headlight control
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
automatically becomes active again. vated.
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform For additional information, refer to
the reset of the system again. Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
fer to page 94.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Front fog lights
center or repair shop as needed.
Front fog lights are activated.
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
For additional information, refer to
Front fog lights, refer to page 97.
78
Displays CONTROLS
High-beam Assistant Symbols

High-beam Assistant is switched on. Within the supplementary text, the following
functions can be selected independent of the
High beams are activated and off auto‐
check control message.
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
uation. ▷ Display additional information about
the Check Control message in the
For additional information, refer to High-beam
Integrated Owner's Manual.
Assistant, refer to page 96.
▷ "Service request"
Cruise control Contact a dealer’s service center or another

qualified service center or repair shop.
The system is switched on. It maintains
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel. Contact Roadside Assistance.
Hiding Check Control messages

Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 67.
General lamps
At least one Check Control message is
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
displayed or is stored.
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
played continuously and are not cleared
Text messages
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
Text messages in combination with a symbol in eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control sages are displayed consecutively.
message and the meaning of the indicator and
warning lights. These messages can be faded for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
played again automatically.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
an error or the required action, can be called up automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
via Check Control. They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
With urgent messages the added text will be
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
79
CONTROLS Displays
Displaying stored Check Control Resetting the trip odometer

messages Press the knob.
▷ The odometer is displayed
1. "Vehicle info" when the ignition is switched
2. "Vehicle status" off.
3. "Check Control" ▷ When the ignition is switched

on, the trip odometer is re‐
4. Select the text message. set.
Messages after trip completion

Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched External temperature
off.
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, a signal sounds.
A Check Control message is dis‐
Fuel gauge played.
Vehicle tilt position may cause There is an increased risk of ice
the display to vary. on roads.
The arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the WARNING
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
Hints on refueling, refer to page 174. there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted Time
to protect the engine.
The time is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Setting the time on the Control
Odometer and trip odom‐ Display, refer to page 87.
eter
The concept Date
Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster. The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Set the date on the Control Dis‐
play, refer to page 87.
80
Displays CONTROLS
Range Service requirements

Display The concept
With a low remaining range: After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving distance
▷ A Check Control message is
or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
displayed briefly.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
▷ The remaining range is
ice requirements from your remote control.
shown on the onboard com‐
puter.
Display
▷ With a dynamic driving style, e.g. taking
curves aggressively, the engine function is Detailed information on service
not always ensured. requirements
The Check Control message appears continu‐ More information on the scope of service re‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. quired can be displayed on the Control Display.
CAUTION 1. "Vehicle info"

With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km 2. "Vehicle status"
it is possible that the engine will no longer have 3. "Service required"
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
fuel promptly.◀
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion.
Displaying the cruising range
1. "Settings" Symbols
2. "Instrument cluster"
Symbols Description
3. "Range"
No service is currently required.
Current fuel consump‐

The deadline for scheduled
tion maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
The concept ing.
Displays the current fuel consumption. Check
The service deadline has al‐
whether you are currently driving in an efficient
ready passed.
and environmentally-friendly manner.
Displaying the current fuel Entering appointment dates

consumption
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
1. "Settings"
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
2. "Instrument cluster" set correctly.
3. "Current consumption"
81
CONTROLS Displays
On the Control Display: Steptronic transmission: displaying

1. "Vehicle info" Example Description
2. "Vehicle status"
Fuel efficient gear is set.
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:" Shift into fuel efficient gear.
6. Adjust the settings.

7. Confirm.
The entered date is stored.
Speed limit detection
Gear shift indicator The concept
The concept Speed limit detection

The system recommends the most fuel efficient Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐
gear for the current driving situation. mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The camera at the base of the interior rear‐
General information view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of
the road as well as variable overhead sign
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐
road conditions, etc. are also detected and
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
tronic transmission and with manual
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐
transmission.
played depending on the situation.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
With the navigation system, the system takes
played in the instrument cluster.
into account the information stored in the navi‐
gation data and also displays speed limits
Manual transmission: displaying present on routes without signs.
Example Description Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐
ject to limitations imposed by technology.
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Speed limits with extra text characters are al‐
ways displayed.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.

Information
Speed limits when towing a trailer are not
shown.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess visibility
and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions.
82
Displays CONTROLS
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in With navigation system: speed
the respective situations.◀ limit detection is not available.
Overview
Camera Without navigation system:

speed limit detection switched
on but no speed limit or cancel‐
lation is detected.
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
view mirror. lowing situations:
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
Switching on/off front of you.
1. "Settings" ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
2. "Instrument cluster" ▷ When the windshield behind the interior
3. "Speed limit information" rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be
displayed on the info display in the instrument ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
cluster via the on-board comupter. camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
Display system are incorrect.
The following is displayed in the instrument ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
cluster: tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
Speed limit detection as due to changes in road routing.
The last speed limit detected. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
Without a navigation system the sticker.
traffic signals are grayed out af‐ ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
ter curves or longer stretches of ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
roadway. ately after vehicle delivery.
83
CONTROLS Displays
Selection lists in the in‐ On-board computer

strument cluster
Calling up information on the info
The concept display
With the buttons on the steering wheel and the
display in the instrument cluster the following
can be displayed or operated:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dynam‐
ics Control.
Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Display Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
info display:
Activating a list and adjusting the ▷ Range.
setting ▷ GREEN Info.
Button the steering wheel Function

When GREEN Mode is activated.
▷ Average fuel consumption.
Activate the respec‐
tive list and select the ▷ Current fuel consumption.
desired settings. ▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
Confirm the selection. ▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Speed limit detection.
84
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Speed. Resetting average values
Adjusting the info display

You can select what information from the on-
board comupter is to be displayed on the info
display of the instrument cluster.
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
3. Select the desired displays. Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
Information in detail Engine temperature display

Displays the current engine temperature, based
Range on a combination of coolant and motor oil tem‐
Displays the estimated cruising range available perature. As soon as the optimum operating
with the remaining fuel. temperature has been attained, the indicator is
It is calculated based on your driving style over in the center position.
the last 20 miles/30 km. If the engine oil or coolant, thus the engine, be‐
come too hot, a Check Control message is dis‐
GREEN info played.
Description of GREEN info, refer to page 167. Check the coolant level, refer to page 198.
Average fuel consumption Distance to destination

This is calculated for the period while the en‐ The distance remaining to the destination is
gine is running. displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
The average fuel consumption is calculated for gation system before the trip is started.
the distance traveled since the last reset by the The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
on-board comupter. tomatically.
Average speed Time of arrival

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
engine manually stopped are not included in destination is entered in the navigation system
the calculation of the average speed. before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Speed limit detection

Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 82, function.
85
CONTROLS Displays
Trip on-board computer Sport instruments

The vehicle features two types of on-board On the Control Display, values for power and
computers. torque are displayed.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
often as necessary. Displaying sport instruments
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an Via onboard monitor:
overview of the current trip. 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Driving Excitement"
Resetting the trip on-board computer
3. "Sports instruments"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1. "Vehicle info"
1. Activating SPORT.
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
3. "Sports instruments"
"Automatically reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
standstill.
Vehicle state
The following vehicle and surrounding area
Display on the Control Display data are automatically checked and evaluated
in succession:
Display the on-board comupter or trip on-
board computer on the Control Display. ▷ Range.
On the Control Display: ▷ Engine temperature.
▷ External temperature.
1. "Vehicle info"
▷ SPORT program state.
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is
Resetting the fuel consumption and displayed.
speed
Checking vehicle state
Via onboard monitor:
1. "Vehicle info"
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
4. "Yes"
1. Activating SPORT.
Driving Excitement 2. "Driving Excitement"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
The concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can
be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be
checked before the use of the SPORT program.
86
Displays CONTROLS
Speed warning Settings on the Control

Display
The concept
Displays speed limit which, when reached, Time
should cause a warning to be issued.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Setting the time zone
drops below the set speed limit once by at least 1. "Settings"
3 mph/5 km/h.
2. "Time/Date"
Displaying, setting or changing the 3. "Time zone:"

limit 4. Select the desired time zone.
On the Control Display: The time zone is stored.
1. "Settings"
Setting the time
2. "Speed"
1. "Settings"
3. "Warning at:"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
3. "Time:"
displayed.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
The speed limit is stored.
Activating/deactivating the limit 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
nutes are displayed.
1. "Settings"
The time is stored.
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning" Setting the time format
4. Press the controller. 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
Setting your current speed as the limit 3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
1. "Settings" The time format is stored.
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed" Date
4. Press the controller. Setting the date
The current vehicle speed is stored as the 1. "Settings"
limit.
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed.
87
CONTROLS Displays
5. Press the controller. Brightness

6. Make the necessary settings for the month
and year. Setting the brightness
The date is stored. To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Setting the date format
2. "Control display"
1. "Settings"
3. "Brightness"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
3. "Format:" ness is set.
4. Select the desired format. 5. Press the controller.
The date format is stored. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Language
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Setting the language
To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings" LED ring on the central

2. "Language/Units" instrument cluster
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language. The concept
Settings are stored for the profile currently The LED ring displays light animations to repre‐
used. sent specific functions.
Setting the voice dialog Basic displays

Voice dialog for the voice activation system, re‐ Basic functions, for example the tachometer,
fer to page 27. can be set to be displayed continually if so de‐
sired.
Units of measurement
Event displays
Setting the units of measurement Functions that are only displayed temporarily,
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ for example the volume or temperature set‐
distance and temperature: tings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can also be
1. "Settings" displayed on the LED ring. This display corre‐
2. "Language/Units" sponds with the displays of the function in the
3. Select the desired menu item. respective display.
4. Select the desired unit.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster,
used.
the light animations of the tachometer's basic
display show the current RPMs and the respec‐
tive RPM warning margins.
88
Displays CONTROLS
Display Head-up Display

Overview
▷ Arrow 1: current RPM.

▷ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▷ Arrow 3: warning field.
The concept
Switching on/off LED ring This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
1. "Settings"
The driver can quickly absorb information and
2. "Center Instrument"
concentrate on the traffic situation.
Information
Adjusting the LED ring
CAUTION
1. "Settings"
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or dam‐
3. "Basic display" or "Event display" aged. There is risk of property damage. Do not
4. Select desired setting. place any objects on the Head-up Display, at‐
tach to system components or plug into the
Setting the brightness system. Do not move the moving parts man‐
The brightness can be adjusted when night ually.◀
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
1. "Settings" When extending and retracting the pro‐
2. "Center Instrument" jection screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is risk of injuries.
3. "Brightness"
Make sure that the area of movement of the
4. Turn the controller. projection screen is clear during opening and
Settings are stored for the profile currently closing.◀
used.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
up Display, refer to page 223.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
89
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ 3. "Displayed information"

play. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. Display.
▷ Wet roads. Settings are stored for the profile currently
▷ Unfavorable light conditions. used.
Switching on/off Setting the brightness

When switching on, the projection lens of the The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
Head-up Display is extended. When switching ambient brightness.
off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
is retracted again. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
ness of the Head-up Display can be additionally
Press button. influenced using the instrument lighting, refer
to page 97.
Display
used.
Overview
Adjusting the height
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed. 1. "Settings"
▷ Navigation system. 2. "Head-Up Display"
▷ Check Control messages. 3. "Height"
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. 4. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display Setting the rotation
On the Control Display: The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
1. "Settings"
90
Displays CONTROLS
On the Control Display: 4 Current engine speed

1. "Settings" 5 Warning field, speed
3. "Rotation" Shift point indicator
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected. The concept
5. Press the controller. Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display in‐
dicates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a
Settings are stored for the profile currently sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle
used. acceleration is achieved.
John Cooper Works: Sport displays in Functional requirements

the Head-up Display
▷ Steptronic transmission:
General information Manual mode M/S and if necessary the Dy‐
The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist namic Traction Control DTC are activated.
with a sporty driving style. ▷ Press the gas pedal all the way down.
Switching on Switching on
1. "Settings" Shift point indicators are displayed in the Head-
2. "Head-Up Display" up if the sport displays, refer to page 91,are
switched on.
3. "Displayed information"
4. "Sport displays" 1. "Settings"
With navigation system: if the sport displays are 2. "Head-Up Display"

switched on, no navigation content will be dis‐ 3. "Displayed information"
played on the Head-up Display. 4. "Sport displays"
Display Display
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate the
upcoming upshift moment.
As soon as the red fields light up, shift up im‐
mediately.
When the permitted maximum speed is
reached, all shift point indicators flash.
When the maximum speed is exceeded, the
supply of fuel is interrupted in order to protect
the engine.
1 Speed
2 Shift point indicator
3 Gear display
91
CONTROLS Displays
Chrono package in the ▷ Measuring and storing of up to nine lap

times.
cockpit ▷ Displaying the time.
The concept The red indicator light indicates that the

stop watch is active.
The Chrono package consists of three display
instruments in the cockpit, where the engine oil
Overview, buttons
pressure, the turbocharger boost, and the time
are displayed. In addition, intermediate and to‐
tal times can be measured using the stop
watch.
The display elements of the Chrono package
mainly support a sporty driving style, e,g, on
racetracks.
Overview
▷ MODE button, arrow 1.

▷ START/STOP button, arrow 2.
▷ RESET/LAP buttons, arrow 3.
Displaying the measured times

The times measured using the stop watch are
shown in minutes and seconds on the display.
For times greater than 60 minutes, the num‐
1 Engine oil pressure display bers of hours and the minutes with seconds are
2 Display of turbocharger boost alternatively displayed.
3 Time/stop watch If the stop watch is running, the seconds are
also shown using a seconds pointer in the scale
of the display element.
Engine oil pressure
The current engine oil pressure is displayed. At Measuring the total time
low temperatures, there can be an increase in 1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
the engine oil pressure. watch.
2. Press button, arrow 2, again to stop the
Turbocharger boost
stop watch.
The current boost of the engine's turbocharger
is displayed. Lap times
Stop watch General information

It is possible to measure and store up to nine
General information
lap times. Older lap times are overwritten.
The stop watch contains the following features:
▷ Measuring the total time.
92
Displays CONTROLS
Measuring and storing a lap time

1. Press button, arrow 2, to start the stop
watch.
2. Press button, arrow 3, to measure and store
a lap time.
The lap time is briefly shown in the display
and via the seconds pointer of the stop
watch, e.g., LAP 1 with the measured time.
The stop watch continues running in the
background.
3. If needed, press button, arrow 3, again to
measure a further lap time.
Calling up lap times

1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
LAP 1 is shown on the display.
2. Press button, arrow 2, to call up the individ‐
ual lap times.
Deleting lap times

1. Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until
LAP 1 is shown on the display.
2. Press button, arrow 3, to delete all stored
lap times.
Displaying the time

The time is copied from the instrument cluster.
Press button, arrow 1, repeatedly until the time
is displayed.
93
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and op‐ Symbol Function
tions Lights off

Daytime running lights
specific and optional features offered with the Parking lights
the selected options or country versions. This Low beams
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ Instrument lighting
Overview
Parking lights, corner‐
Switches in the vehicle ing lights and roadside
parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver door is opened with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off at these switch settings.
The light switch elements is located next to the

Parking lights
steering wheel. Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Light functions Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, the battery may become dis‐
Symbol Function
charged and it would then be impossible to
Rear fog lights start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking lamp, refer to page 95.
Front fog lights
Low beams
Position of switch:
Automatic headlight control
The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
94
Lights CONTROLS
Roadside parking lights Headlight courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the vehi‐
cle's radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on used.
With the ignition switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds. Automatic headlight
control
Switch off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in The concept
the opposite direction. The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
Welcome lights and precipitation.
headlight courtesy de‐
General information
lay feature A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Welcome lights
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
Depending on the equipment, when switching
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
off the vehicle, switch position or .
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
The parking, low beam and interior lights light
up briefly when unlocking the vehicle or de‐ Activating
pending on the ambient brightness.
Position of switch:
Activating/deactivating The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster

lights up when the low beams are switched on.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting" System limits
3. "Welcome lights" The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
Settings are stored for the profile currently as a substitute for your personal judgment of
used. lighting conditions.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these
95
CONTROLS Lights
conditions, you should always switch on the High-beam Assistant

lights manually.
The concept
When the low beams are activated, this system
Daytime running lights automatically switches the high beams on and
Position of switch: , , off. The procedure is controlled by a camera on
the front of the interior rearview mirror. The as‐
The daytime running lights light up when the
sistant ensures that the high beams are acti‐
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
vated whenever the traffic situation allows. The
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
driver can intervene at any time and switch the
tion .
high beams on and off as usual. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
Activating/deactivating
on by the system.
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ Activating
vate the daytime running lights.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Settings are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently used.
The High-beam Assistant can be activated

Cornering lamp when the low beams are activated.
Position of switch: 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
When going around corners, the cornering light switch into position or .
also lights the interior area of the curve. Below 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, arrow.
a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h when the
The indicator lamp in the instrument
turn signal is switched on and the steering an‐
cluster lights up.
gle is detected, there is automatic activation.
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
Malfunction tomatically brightened or dimmed.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have the traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
system checked as soon as possible. adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
96
Lights CONTROLS
Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights

manually
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator lamp
lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 95, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. When the high beams or headlight flasher are
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. Rear fog lights
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press The low beams or front fog lights must be
the button on the turn signal lever, refer to switched on.
page 96.
Press button. The yellow indicator
System limits lamp lights up.
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a If the automatic headlight control, refer to
substitute for the driver's personal judgment of page 95, is activated, the low beams will come
when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐ on automatically when you switch on the rear
ually switch off the high beams in situations fog lights.
where required to avoid a safety risk.
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention Instrument lighting
may be necessary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Adjusting
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
The parking lights or low beams
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such must be switched on to adjust
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders the brightness.
and wagons; when driving close to train or
Adjust the brightness with the
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
thumbwheel.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on freeways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
97
CONTROLS Lights
Interior lights Activating/deactivating

General information 1. "Settings"
The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
2. "Lighting"
and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally. 3. "Ambient:"
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Settings are stored for the profile currently
trols brightness of some of these features. used.
Overview Changing color

Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Push and hold the switch forward or

back: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
1 Interior lights justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
2 Reading lamp lighting or on the Control Display.
3 Ambient light On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Switching the interior lights on and off 2. "Lighting"
Press button. 3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
To switch off permanently: press the button for
approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located in the front next to

the interior light.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
98
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
99
CONTROLS Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the modify them in any way.
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
through side windows during rollovers or side passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
impact events. tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
Knee airbag devices or' mobile phones.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
impact. the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not specifically suited for seats with
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end integrated side airbags.
collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Information for optimum effect of the
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
WARNING This also applies to steering wheel covers,
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ the dashboard, and the seats.
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
airbag system cannot protect as intended or Even when you follow all instructions very
cause additional injuries due to triggering. closely, injury from contact with the airbags
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐ cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
serve the Information for optimum protective
effect of the airbag system.◀ The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. ing impairment in sensitive individuals.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Warnings and information on the airbags are
away from the side airbag. also found on the sun visors.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Functional readiness of the airbag
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep system
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ Information
gered. WARNING
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting Individual components can be hot after
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
in the floor area. injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
▷ There should be no persons, animals or ob‐
jects between an airbag and a person. WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
100
Safety CONTROLS
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐ life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐ his or her feet in the floor area.◀
spective accident severity. There is risk of
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐ Malfunction of the automatic
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ deactivation system
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
When transporting older children and adults,
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
Correct function the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
When the ignition is switched on, the airbags lights up.
warning lamp in the instrument cluster In this case, change the sitting position so that
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
the operational readiness of the entire airbag and the indicator lamp goes out.
system and the belt tensioner. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Airbag system malfunctioning To enable correct recognition of the occupied
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the seat cushion
ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
Automatic deactivation of the front- safe for use on the front passenger seat.
seat passenger airbags ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
The concept to be installed on it.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ could press against the seat from below.
sistance.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ Indicator lamp for the front-seat
vated. passenger airbags
Information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety notes and instruc‐
tions for children on the front passenger seat,
see Children.
WARNING
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
bag function, it must be detected, whether a
person occupies the front passenger seat. The The indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
entire seat cushion area must be used for this airbags indicates the operating state of the
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to front-seat passenger airbags.
101
CONTROLS Safety
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ An appropriate Check Control message is dis‐
ther activated or deactivated. played.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up 1. Move the respective seat all the way for‐
when a child is properly ward.
seated in a child restraint fix‐ 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It
ing system or when the seat moves forward briefly.
is empty. The airbags on the 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
front passenger side are not
activated. The calibration procedure is completed when
the Check Control message disappears.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
size is detected on the seat. The airbags on peat the calibration.
the front passenger side are activated. If the message does not disappear after a re‐
peat calibration, have the system checked as
Detected child seats soon as possible.
The system generally detects children seated in
a child seat, particularly in child seats required
by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. Tire Pressure Monitor
After installing a child seat, make sure that the TPM
indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger air‐
bags lights up. This indicates that the child seat
The concept
has been detected and the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags are not activated. The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
passenger airbag
valves measure the tire inflation pressure.
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front passenger's airbags very much depends
Information
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐
er's seat. With use of the system observe further infor‐
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
To maintain the accuracy of this function over fer to page 178.
the long-term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a relevant Check Control message is dis‐
Functional requirements
played. A message also appears on the Control
Display. The system must have been reset with the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of tire pressure loss is not assured.
Calibrating the front seats
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
WARNING
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
There is risk of jamming when moving the wheel change.
seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of property
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to en‐
damage. Make sure that the area of movement
sure that the system will operate properly.
of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.◀
102
Safety CONTROLS
Status display On the Control Display and on the vehicle:

The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor 1. "Vehicle info"
TPM can be displayed on the Control Display,
2. "Vehicle status"
e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
3. "Perform reset"
4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
1. "Vehicle info"
5. Reset the tire inflation pressure using
2. "Vehicle status" "Perform reset".
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" 6. Drive away.
The status is displayed. The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
Status control display
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
Tire and system status are indicated by the short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
color of the tires and a text message on the accepted as reference values. The resetting
Control Display. process is completed automatically while driv‐
ing. After successful completion of the reset,
All wheels green the tires appear in green on the Control Display
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is dis‐
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during played.
the last reset. The progress of the reset is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
One wheel is yellow
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. Low tire pressure message
All wheels are yellow The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Wheels, gray ▷ A reset of the system was not carried out
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a after a wheel was changed. The system
malfunction. therefore issues a warning based on the tire
pressures before the last reset.
Status information 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
The status control display additionally shows Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the vers.
actual values read; they may vary depending
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
on driving style or weather conditions.
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Carry out reset Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change.
103
CONTROLS Safety
WARNING Continued driving with a flat tire

A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat
vers.
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Ob‐ 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
serve the information on run-flat tires and con‐ next opportunity.
tinued driving with these tires.◀ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC shown to be correct, it is possible that the
Dynamic Stability Control. Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform a re‐
set. Then perform the reset.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
Normal tires The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
1. Identify the damaged tire. inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
Do this by checking the air pressure in all ing style and road conditions.
four tires. A vehicle with an average load has a possible
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐ driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
tem, refer to page 188, can be used for this A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently,
purpose. e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is ing, a longer braking distance and different
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
have been initialized. In this case, initialize style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
the system. neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service Because the possible driving distance depends
center or another qualified service center or on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
repair shop. actual distance may be shorter or longer de‐
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
refer to page 188.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, WARNING
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this Your vehicle handles differently when a
case, have the electronics checked at the next run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
opportunity and have them replaced if needed. tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
reduced when braking, braking distances are
Run-flat tires longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Maximum speed Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
You may continue driving with a damaged tire 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
104
Safety CONTROLS
Final tire failure Malfunction

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ The yellow warning lamp flashes and
cate the final failure of a tire. then lights up continuously. A Check
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of Control message is displayed. No flat
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.
dent. Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s ing situations:
service center or another qualified service cen‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
ter or repair shop. mounted, e.g. emergency wheel: Have it
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
Required inflation pressure check other qualified service center or repair shop
message as needed.
A Check Control message is displayed in the fol‐ ▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a
lowing situations dealer’s service center or another qualified
▷ The system has detected a wheel change, service center or repair shop.
but no reset was done. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to set the system again.
specifications. ▷ Interference through systems or devices
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
the level of the last confirmation. ing the area of the interference, the system
automatically becomes active again.
In this case:
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
needed. 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
change. should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
System limits by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
The system does not function properly if a reset placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is re‐ vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
ported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐ indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
rect. pressure label, you should determine the
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As
temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
will increase the tire's temperature, thus in‐ equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐
creasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire in‐ tem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
flation pressure is reduced when the tire tem‐ telltale when one or more of your tires is signifi‐
perature falls again. These circumstances may cantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
cause a warning when temperatures fall very low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
sharply. stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
damage caused by external circumstances. tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un‐
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
105
CONTROLS Safety
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han‐ Functional requirements
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the The system must have been initialized when
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte‐ the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-in‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. every tire or wheel change.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when Status display
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.,
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
whether or not the FTM is active.
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continu‐ On the Control Display:
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue 1. "Vehicle info"
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction 2. "Vehicle status"
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in‐ The status is displayed.
tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va‐
riety of reasons, including the installation of re‐ Initialization
placement or alternate tires or wheels on the
When initializing the once set inflation tire pres‐
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
firming the inflation pressures.
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re‐
placement or alternate tires and wheels allow Do not initialize the system when driving with
the TPMS to continue to function properly. snow chains.
1. "Vehicle info"
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 2. "Vehicle status"
The concept 3. "Perform reset"
The system does not measure the actual infla‐ 4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
tion pressure in the tires. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
It detects a tire inflation pressure loss by com‐ 6. Drive away.
paring the rotational speeds of the individual The initialization is completed while driving,
wheels while moving. which can be interrupted at any time.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the The initialization automatically continues when
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of driving resumes.
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
detected and reported as a flat tire. Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
106
Safety CONTROLS
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation Actions in the event of a flat tire
pressure.
Normal tires
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers. Do this by checking the air pressure in all
four tires.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires. The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility Sys‐
tem, refer to page 188, can be used for this
Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are la‐
purpose.
beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
WARNING been initialized. In this case, initialize the
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ system.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, If identification of flat tire damage is not
such as steering and braking response. Run-flat possible, please contact a dealer’s service
tires can maintain limited stability. There is risk center or another qualified service center or
of an accident. Do not continue driving if the repair shop.
vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires. Ob‐
serve the information on run-flat tires and con‐ 2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System,
tinued driving with these tires.◀ refer to page 188.
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ Run-flat tires

bility Control is switched on if needed.
Maximum speed
System limits You may continue driving with a damaged tire
A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. Continued driving with a flat tire
Sudden serious tire damage caused by external If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations: 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷ When the system has not been initialized. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction been initialized. In this case, initialize the
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). system.
▷ When driving with snow chains. Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
107
CONTROLS Safety
A vehicle with an average load has a possible ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. ing function, refer to page 109.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differently, ▷ Pedestrian warning with City Braking func‐
e.g., it has reduced lane stability during brak‐ tion, refer to page 112.
ing, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving Information
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
WARNING
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc. Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to system
Because the possible driving distance depends
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the
not be output or they may be output too late or
actual distance may be shorter or longer de‐
incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
pending on the driving speed, road conditions,
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
external temperature, cargo load, etc.
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
WARNING spective situations.◀
Your vehicle handles differently when a
WARNING
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is Due to system limits, individual functions
reduced when braking, braking distances are can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
longer and the self-steering properties will with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
change. There is risk of an accident. e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switch
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
starting/towing.◀
Final tire failure

Overview
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire. Button in the vehicle
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Intelligent Safety
Intelligent Safety button
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Switching on/off
The intelligent safety systems can hel prevent Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
an imminent collision. cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
108
Safety CONTROLS
gent Safety systems activate according to the With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
last setting. intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system reac‐
Press button briefly:
tions.
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems General information
are individually switched off ac‐
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
cording to their respective settings.
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
to their individual settings. the current driving situation.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
for the profile currently used. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Press button again:

Detection range
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

turned off.
▷ The LED goes out.
It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system.
Front-end collision
warning with City Brak‐ Information
ing function
WARNING
The concept Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to system
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
not be output or they may be output too late or
help reduce the collision speed.
incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
ently if needed. spective situations.◀
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration. WARNING
The system is controlled via a camera in the Due to system limits, individual functions
base of the mirror. can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
The front-end collision warning is available
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switch
109
CONTROLS Safety
all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow- ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system
starting/towing.◀ is displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
Overview settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
Button in the vehicle to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:

activated.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.
Camera
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the onboard
monitor.
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired warning time on the
Control Display.
The selected warning time is stored for the pro‐
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
file currently used.
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Warning with braking function
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Display
Switching on/off If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
Switching on automatically ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
The system is automatically active after every
driving-off.
Switching on/off manually

110
Safety CONTROLS
Symbol Measure The braking intervention can be interrupted by

stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
moving the steering wheel.
Brake and increase distance.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic of the detection range and functional restric‐
signal sounds: acute warning. tions are to be considered.
You are requested to intervene by
System limits
braking or make an evasive maneu‐
ver.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Prewarning
Thus a system reaction might not come or
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the might come late.
impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning. ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
Acute warning with braking function ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐ ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
ferential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there Functional limitations
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is The system may not be fully functional in the
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ following situations:
vention in a possible risk of collision.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Acute warnings can also be triggered without fall.
previous forewarning.
▷ In tight curves.
Braking intervention ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the

front windshield are dirty or covered.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist gine, via the Start/Stop button.
with some braking intervention if there is risk of ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ately after vehicle delivery.
come to a complete stop.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐ cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may low in the sky.
be shut down.
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
111
CONTROLS Safety
Warning sensitivity ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the

The more sensitive the warning settings are, vehicle.
the more warnings are displayed. However, ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
there may also be an excess of false warnings. left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
Pedestrian warning with sued about pedestrians who are located within
the extended area only if they are moving in
city braking function
the direction of the central area.
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐ Information
destrians. WARNING
The system issues a warning in the city driving Indicators and warnings do not relieve
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ from the personal responsibility. Due to system
lision with pedestrians and includes a braking limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
function. not be output or they may be output too late or
A camera at the base of the rearview mirror incorrectly. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
controls the system. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
General information spective situations.◀
With sufficient brightness, the system warns WARNING
about possible collision danger with pedes‐
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐ Due to system limits, individual functions
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
before a collision. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
Under those circumstances it reacts to people ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switch
who are within the detection range of the sys‐ all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-
tem. starting/towing.◀
Detection range
Overview
Button in the vehicle
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas
112
Safety CONTROLS
Intelligent Safety button ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are turned off.
Camera
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ make an evasive maneuver.
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Braking intervention
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
Switching on/off ing force is used. Premise for the brake booster
is sufficiently quick and sufficiently hard step‐
Switching on automatically ping on the brake pedal. The system can assist
The system is automatically active after every with some braking intervention if there is risk of
driving-off. a collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop.
Switching on/off manually Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
be shut down.
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
The braking intervention is executed only if DSC
system is displayed. The systems
Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
are individually switched off ac‐
cording to their respective settings. The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
moving the steering wheel.
to their individual settings.
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
of the detection range and functional restric‐
for the profile currently used.
tions are to be considered.
Press button again:
System limits
activated. Detection range
▷ The LED lights up green. The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
ited.
Hold down button:
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
113
CONTROLS Safety
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ Brake force display

tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. The concept
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ During normal brake application, the brake
lights light up.
fall.
▷ During heavy brake application, the flash‐
ers light up in addition.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
front windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. PostCrash
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ In the event of an accident, the system can
gine, via the Start/Stop button. bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ tervention by the driver in certain situations.
ately after vehicle delivery. This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun Depressing the brake pedal can cause the vehi‐
low in the sky. cle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic
braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐
▷ When it is dark outside.
terrupts automatic braking.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released au‐
tomatically. Secure the vehicle against rolling.
114
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and op‐ DSC Dynamic Stability
tions Control
The concept
series. It also describes features that are not DSC prevents traction loss in the power wheels
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to when driving off and accelerating.
the selected options or country versions. This DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle conditions
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within the
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehicle on
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ a steady course by reducing engine speed and
tive features and systems. by applying brakes to the individual wheels.
Information
Anti-lock Braking System Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
appropriate driving style is always the responsi‐
ABS
bility of the driver.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
braking. even with DSC.
The vehicle contains its steering power even Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
during full brake applications, thus increasing margin by driving in a risky manner.
active safety.
WARNING
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine. When driving with roof load, e.g. with
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk of
Brake assistant accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when
automatically produces the greatest possible driving with roof load.◀
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Indicator/warning lights
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls
by ABS.
the drive and braking forces.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
for the duration of the emergency stop.
failed.
115
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF The system ensures maximum headway on

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
duced during acceleration and when driving in e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
curves. what limited driving stability.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
as soon as possible. provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
Deactivating DSC curves.
Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ under the following special circumstances:
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
The DSC system is switched off. snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose grounds.
Activating DSC
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
lamp go out. Traction Control
Indicator/warning lights Activating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed Press button.
in the instrument cluster. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is de‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
activated. OFF lights up.
Automatic activation Deactivating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation Press button again.
occurs in the following situations: TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. lamp go out.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
DTC Dynamic Traction
vehicle.
Control To increase maneuverability, with a corre‐
spondingly sporty driving style, wheels are
The concept braked individually.
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.
116
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Dynamic Damping Con‐ With each starting operation, MID is activated

using the Start/Stop button.
trol
GREEN
The concept GREEN, refer to page 165, provides consistent
The tuning of the suspension can be changed tuning to maximize range.
with the system.
Activating GREEN
Programs Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until
The system offers several different programs. GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
Control, refer to page 117. Configuring GREEN
MID/GREEN Via the Driving Dynamics Control

Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for 1. Activate GREEN.
more comfort. 2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
SPORT
This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
Consistently sporty tuning of the shock absorb‐
activated.
ers for greater driving agility.
1. "Settings"
Driving Dynamics Con‐
2. "GREEN Mode"
trol
or
The concept 1. "Settings"
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- 2. "Driving mode"
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Choose 3. "Configure GREEN"
between three different programs. Driving Dy‐
namics Control will activate the particular pro‐ Configure the program.
gram. This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is
activated.
Operating the programs
SPORT
Driving Dynamics Control Program
Consistently sporty tuning of the engine control
MID for greater driving agility.
GREEN With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
SPORT the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
MID
For balanced tuning.
117
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Activating SPORT Display on the onboard monitor

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the left until Program changes can be displayed on the on‐
SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. board monitor.
1. "Settings"
Configuring SPORT
2. "Control display"
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
when the display is activated on the Control 3. "Driving mode info"
Display, the SPORT driving mode can be config‐
ured for individual specifications.
Activating SPORT. Drive-off assistant
Select "Configure SPORT". This system supports driving off on inclines. The
Configure the program. parking brake is not required.
SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
vated: brake.
1. "Settings" 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
2. "Driving mode"
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
3. "Configure SPORT"
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is
For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐
activated.
sions, the possible holding duration amounts to
2 minutes.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driving
programs in Driving mode:
▷ GREEN, refer to page 117.
▷ SPORT, refer to page 117.
Displays
Program selection
With Driving Dynamics Control
turned on a list of programs is
displayed and can be selected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
118
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and op‐ General information
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
tions approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Active cruise control is paused below approx.
specific and optional features offered with the 20 mph/30 km/h.
The system does not brake to a stop.
the selected options or country versions. This Depending on the driving program, refer to
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ page 117, set, the characteristics of the cruise
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ control in particular areas can change.
tive features and systems. Information
WARNING
Camera-based cruise con‐ sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
trol fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
The concept tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
Use this system to select a desired speed that
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear
spective situations.◀
roads.
To the extent possible, the system automati‐ WARNING
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle The system does not relieve from the per‐
ahead of you. sonal responsibility to correctly assess visibility
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is and traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
used to detect vehicles driving ahead. Adjust the driving style to the traffic conditions.
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. the respective situations.◀
For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.

Overview
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
tomatically decelerates, applies the brakes
Buttons on the steering wheel
lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead
begins moving faster. Press button Function
As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle acceler‐ Cruise control on/off, refer to
ates to the desired speed. page 120
The speed is also maintained downhill, but may
not be maintained uphill if engine power is in‐ Store/maintain speed, refer to
sufficient. page 121
119
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Press button Function Display in the instrument cluster lights

up.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 120
Display in the instrument cluster lights
Continue cruise control with the up. The current speed is adopted as de‐
last setting, refer to page 121 sired speed and displayed with symbol.
Reduce distance, refer to Cruise control is active and maintains the set
page 121 speed.
Increase distance, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched
page 121 on if needed.
Increase, maintain, and store
Switch off
speed, refer to page 121
Press button on the steering wheel.
Reduce, maintain, and store
speed, refer to page 121
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's ser‐
ies, optional features and country specifica‐ Interrupting
tions.
Camera
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If selector lever position N is set.
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐
vated or DSC is deactivated.
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
view mirror.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ paired, e.g., by soiling, heavy precipitation
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. or glare effects from the sun.
▷ If the vehicle in front decelerates below a
Switching on/off and interrupting cruise speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
control
Switching on
120
Maintaining, storing, and changing the ▷ or button: each time it is pressed to

speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
Information 1 mph/1 km/h.
WARNING ▷ or button: each time it is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ or button: hold down to repeat the cor‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀ responding action.
WARNING Distance
Risk of accident due to too high speed WARNING
differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the follow‐
ing situations:
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ve‐ braking can be late. There is risk of accidents or
hicle. risk of property damage. Be aware to the traffic
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the
lane. traffic and weather conditions and maintain the
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. prescribed safety distance, possibly by brak‐
ing.◀
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
spective situations.◀ Reduce distance
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
Maintaining/storing the speed sired distance is set.
Press button. The set distance is briefly displayed in

Or: the left part of the instrument cluster.
Press or button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current Increase distance
speed is maintained and stored as the desired Press button repeatedly until the de‐
speed. sired distance is set.
The speed is displayed on the symbol.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be the left part of the instrument cluster.
switched on if needed.
Continue cruise control

Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired speed While driving
is set.
Press button with the system inter‐
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the rupted. Cruise control is continued with
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
121
the saved values. The selected distance is If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
briefly displayed in the info display. conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
▷ When the system is switched off.
Selected distance from the vehicle driving
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the info display.
Changing between cruise control with/
without distance control Distance display
WARNING Distance 1
The system does not react to traffic driv‐
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
Distance 2
stored speed. There is risk of accidents or risk of
property damage. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions and brake as needed.◀
Distance 3
Changing to Active Cruise Control without dis‐
tance control:
Distance 4
Press and hold this button, or
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on.
Press and hold this button.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up. Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
To switch back to cruise control, press one of you.
the buttons briefly.
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐ Symbol flashes orange:
played. The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
Desired speed
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
In addition to the indicator lamp, the pedal.
desired speed is displayed in the central
information display. Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
▷ The indicator lights up green: the system is You are requested to intervene by brak‐
active. ing or make an evasive maneuver.
▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system
has been interrupted. The system has been interrupted or dis‐
tance control is temporarily suppressed
▷ No display: system is switched off.
122
because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; WARNING

a vehicle was not detected. The system does not relieve from the per‐
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
Distance control is temporarily sup‐ fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
pressed because the accelerator pedal it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
is being pressed; a vehicle was de‐ tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
tected. driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
Displays in the Head-up Display spective situations.◀
The information from Active Cruise Control can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Deceleration
Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
page 89. lowing situations:
▷ In case of pedestrians, cyclists or similar
System limits slow road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
Speed range
▷ For cross traffic.
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads. The system is functional at speeds be‐ ▷ For oncoming traffic.
ginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
The max. speed that can be set is lighting at night.
85 mph/140 km/h.
Swerving vehicles
Comply with the legal speed limit and safety
distance in every situation when using the sys‐
tem.
Detection range
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

until it is completely within the same lane as
your vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
The detection capacity of the system and the swerves into your lane, the system may not be
automatic braking capacity are limited. able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
be detected.
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
123
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ After releasing the gas pedal the system is reac‐
vers, if needed. tivated and controls speed independently.
WARNING
Weather
In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading.
Cornering Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
The system may not be fully functional in the
▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
fall.
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ front windshield are dirty or covered.
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
In tight curves the system offers only restricted gine, via the Start/Stop button.
detection where a vehicle ahead of you might
be detected late or not at all. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
Cruise control
The concept
The system is functional at speeds beginning at
approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
It maintains the speed that was set using the
control elements on the steering wheel.
When you approach a curve the system may
The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
gine braking is insufficient.
the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates
you may compensate it by briefly accelerating.
124
Information The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an in‐ The current speed is adopted as the de‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐ sired speed and is displayed with the
tions: symbol in the instrument cluster.
▷ On winding roads.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
▷ In heavy traffic.
speed.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched
on a loose road surface.
on if needed.
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐ Switch off
stant speed is possible.◀
WARNING
General information The system does not relieve from the per‐
Depending on the driving program, refer to fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
page 117, set, the characteristics of the cruise it cannot independently react to all traffic situa‐
control in particular areas can change. tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
Overview traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
Buttons on the steering wheel
Cruise control on/off The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Store speed
Interrupting
Pausing cruise control When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting The system is automatically interrupted in the
Increasing, maintaining or storing
the speed ▷ When the brakes are applied.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
Reducing, maintaining or storing
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
the speed
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
Controls rent speed.
Switching on ▷ If selector lever position N is set.

▷ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
125
Maintaining, storing, and changing the or decelerates the vehicle without requiring
speed pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the
button is released, the vehicle maintains its
Information final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to accel‐
WARNING
erate more rapidly.
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of Continue cruise control
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ Press button on the steering wheel.
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Maintaining/storing the speed
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press button.
Indicator lamp
Or
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
or button: press while the system is in‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
terrupted. ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
When the system is switched on, the current tem is switched on.
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Desired speed
This is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The desired speed is displayed together
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be switched with the symbol.
on if needed.
▷ The indicator lights up green: the
system is active.
Changing the speed
▷ The indicator lights up orange: the system
or button: press repeatedly until the de‐
has been interrupted.
sired speed is set.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
road is clear. conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
▷ or button: each time it is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h. PDC Park Distance Con‐
▷ or button: each time it is pressed
trol
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
The concept
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
PDC supports you when parking. Slowly ap‐
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
proaching an object behind or, with the appro‐
pends on the vehicle.
priate equipment, also in front of your vehicle is
▷ or button: pressing it to the resist‐ signaled by:
ance point and holding it there accelerates
126
▷ Signal tones. Overview

▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
The maneuvering range, depending on obsta‐
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. PDC Park Distance Control
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.

5 ft/1.50 m. Ultrasound sensors
▷ When a collision is imminent
PDC sensors on the vehicle.
Information
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle
may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal
tone.
WARNING Functional requirements
The system does not relieve from the per‐ To ensure full functionality:
sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐ ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, bi‐
fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust cycle racks.
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
do not spray the sensors for long periods and
WARNING maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to phys‐
Switching on/off
ical circumstances. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an
Switching on automatically
object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC PDC switches on automatically in the following
is not yet active.◀ situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If, with the appropriate equipment, obsta‐
cles are detected behind or in front of the
vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than
approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
127
You may turn off automatic activation: Volume

1. "Settings" The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
2. "Parking"
3. Select setting. 1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or
"Settings"
used. 2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
Automatic deactivation during forward 4. "PDC"
travel
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
The system switches off when a certain driving
6. To store: press the controller.
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.
used.
Visual warning
Press button. The approach of the vehicle to an object can be
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
▷ On: the LED lights up. farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
▷ Off: the LED goes out. trol Display before a signal sounds.
The rearview camera image is displayed when A display appears as soon as Park Distance
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the Control (PDC) is activated.
button. The range of the sensors is represented in col‐
ors: red, green and yellow.
Display When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
Signal tones
"Rear view camera"
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
System limits
if an object is detected to the left rear of the ve‐
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
speaker.
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
The shorter the distance to the object, the
the following circumstances:
shorter the intervals.
▷ For small children and animals.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
sounded. coats.
If objects are located both in front of and to the ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
rear of the vehicle, an alternating continuous sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
signal is sounded. machines.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with or out of position.
Steptronic transmission.
128
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as Malfunction

high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ A Check Control message, refer to page 76, is
treme heat or strong wind. displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
vehicles.
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Display.
▷ With moving objects.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. Rearview camera
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences. The concept
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. The rearview camera provides assistance in
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
move into the blind area of the sensors before behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
or after a continuous tone sounds. play.
False warnings Information

PDC may issue a warning under the following WARNING
conditions even though there is no obstacle The system does not relieve from the per‐
within the detection range: sonal responsibility to correctly assess the traf‐
▷ In heavy rain. fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
ice. traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
Overview
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and Button in the vehicle
smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a continuous
tone alternating between the front and rear
speakers. As soon as the malfunction due
to other ultrasound sources is no longer Rearview camera
present, the system is again fully functional.
129
Camera The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
Activating the assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
The camera lens is located in the handle of the tive at the same time.
tailgate. ▷ Parking aid lines
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. "Parking aid lines"
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 223. Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
Switching on/off "Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
Pathway lines
tion P R.
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.

Press button. Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
▷ On: the LED lights up. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
▷ Off: the LED goes out. required when parking and maneuvering on
The PDC is shown on the Control Display. level roads.
The rearview camera image is displayed when Pathway lines depend on the current steering
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the angle and are continuously adjusted to the
button. steering wheel movements.
Switching the view via the onboard

monitor
With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
130
Turning circle lines Parking using pathway and turning

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
Turning circle lines can be superimposed on the

image of the rearview camera.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐ the pathway line covers the corresponding
gle. turning radius line.
Obstacle marking
Display settings
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image Brightness

of the rearview camera. With the rearview camera switched on:
Their colored margins of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC.
is reached and press the controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:

is reached and press the controller.
131
System limits Information

WARNING
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects
such as ledges may not be recognized by the
fic situation. Based on the limits of the system,
system.
Assistance functions also take into account data tions. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the
of the PDC. driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
page 126. spective situations.◀
The objects displayed on the Control Display CAUTION
under certain circumstances are closer than
they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
distance from the objects on the display. cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
terfere in the respective situations.◀
Parking assistant An engine that has been switched off by the

Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
The concept cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Overview
This system assists the driver in parking parallel

to the road.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Parking assistant
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of steering
during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
acoustic information issued by the PDC, the
parking assistant and, where applicable, the
rearview camera, and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 126.
132
Ultrasound sensors ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the

driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set.
Switching on/off
Switching on with the button

Press button.
The LED lights up.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking The current status of the parking space search
spaces are located on the wheel housing. is indicated on the Control Display.
To ensure full functionality: Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.

Switching on with reverse gear
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not Shift into reverse.
spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Requirements Switch off

The system can be deactivated as follows:
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Press button.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Switch off the ignition.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Indicator on the Control Display
Suitable parking space System activated/deactivated
▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m. Symbol Meaning
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum Gray: the system is not available.
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. White: the system is available but not
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: activated.
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m. The system is activated.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
133
System status 2. Follow the instructions on the display.

The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the stationary
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the display.
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
needed.
▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of Interrupting manually

the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
activated and search for parking space ac‐ time:
tive.
▷ "Parking Assistant"
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
▷ Press button.
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
Interrupting automatically
lighted.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system. ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
▷ Parking space search is always active instruction on the display.
whenever the vehicle is moving forward ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ 6 mph/10 km/h.
activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
the displays on the Control Display are surfaces.
shown in gray.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
Parking using the parking assistant
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
WARNING
clearances that are too small.
▷ When switching into other functions of the
radio.
fic situation. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch A Check Control message is displayed.
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively interfere in the respective situations.◀ Resume
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate
tinued if needed.
it if needed.
To do this, follow the instructions on the dis‐
The status of the parking space search is in‐
play.
dicated on the display.
134
System limits Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can

move into the blind area of the sensors before
No parking assistance or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance The parking assistant may identify parking
in the following situations: spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
Functional limitations A Check Control message is displayed.
The system may not be fully functional in the The parking assistant failed. Have the system
following situations: checked.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
135
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Air conditioner
1 Vent settings 6 Recirculated-air mode

2 Air flow 7 Rear window defroster
3 Temperature 8 Windshield defroster
4 Seat heating, right 51 9 Seat heating, left 51
5 Cooling function
136
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control functions in detail ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
Switching the system on/off of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
Switching on
To prevent window condensation, recirculated
Set any air volume. air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐
tain amount of time, depending on the external
Switch off temperature.
Turn wheel for air quantity to the With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
left until the control switches off. quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
Temperature Air flow, manual

Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
air volume.
The higher the rate, the more ef‐
fective the heating or cooling will
be.
Cooling function The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
The car's interior can only be cooled with the duced automatically to save battery power.
engine running.
Press button. Manual air distribution
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ Turn the wheel to select the de‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ sired program or the desired in‐
ting, warmed again. termediate setting.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may

fog up briefly when the engine is started.
▷ Windows.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
▷ Upper body region.
ter, refer to page 160, that will exit from below
the car. ▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐
Recirculated-air mode well.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Defrosts windows and removes
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The condensation
system then recirculates the air currently within Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐
the vehicle. crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
137
Windshield defroster When Green mode, refer to page 165, is acti‐

Press button.
The front window defroster switches Microfilter
off automatically after a certain period of time.
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Rear window defroster This filter should be replaced during scheduled
Press button. maintenance, refer to page 200, of your vehi‐
The rear window defroster switches off cle.
automatically after a certain period of time.
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling

2 Display 10 Cooling function
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
4 AUTO program lated-air mode
5 Air distribution, manual 12 Rear window defroster
6 Display 13 Windshield defroster
7 Temperature, right 14 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐

tion
8 Seat heating, right 51
138
15 Seat heating, left 51
Climate control functions in detail When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water, refer to page 160, develops
Switching the system on/off that exits underneath the vehicle.
Switching on Maximum cooling

Set any air volume. Press button.
The system is set to the lowest temper‐
Switch off
ature, optimum air flow and air circulation
Turn wheel for air quantity to the mode.
left until the control switches off.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
Temperature engine running.
Turn the ring to set the desired Adjust air flow with the program active.
temperature.
AUTO program
Press button.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
The automatic climate control reaches this ture are controlled automatically.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by increasing the cooling or heating output, Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
and then keeps it constant. intensity and outside influences, the air is di‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ rected to the windshield, side windows, upper
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐ body, and into the footwell.
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the The cooling function, refer to page 139, and
set temperature. the automatic recirculation control, refer to
page 140, are automatically also switched on
Cooling function in the AUTO program.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the To switch off the program: press the button
engine running. again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Press button.
Intensity of the AUTO program
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
ting, warmed again. matic intensity control can be changed.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may intensity.
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
139
The selected intensity is displayed on the auto‐ The air flow of the automatic climate control
matic climate control. may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode Manual air distribution
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ Press button repeatedly to select a
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ program:
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within ▷ Upper body region.
the vehicle. ▷ Upper body region and footwell.
Press button repeatedly to select an ▷ Footwell.
operating mode: ▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐ ▷ Windows and upper body region.
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the out‐ ▷ Windows.
side air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the Defrosts windows and removes
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ condensation
manently blocked. Press button.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
air mode switches off automatically after a cer‐ moved from the windshield and the front side
tain amount of time, depending on the external windows.
temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air Adjust air flow with the program active.
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the If the windows fog over, also switch on the
fogging of the windows increases. cooling function or press the AUTO button.
If windows are fogged over, switch off the recir‐
culating mode and press the AUTO button. Windshield defroster
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. Press button.
The front window defroster switches
Air flow, manual off automatically after a certain period of time.
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Rear window defroster
air volume. Press button.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
When Green mode, refer to page 165, is acti‐

Automatic climate control displays the selected
amount of air flow.
140
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter Parked-car ventilation

In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, The concept
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
This filter should be replaced during scheduled cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
maintenance, refer to page 200, of your vehi‐ needed.
cle.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
Ventilation switched on for 30 minutes.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐ Switching on/off directly
justed: On the Control Display:
▷ Direct ventilation:
1. "Settings"
The air flow is directly pointed onto the per‐
son. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, 2. "Climate"
depending on the adjusted temperature. 3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
▷ Indirect ventilation: The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air trol flashes if the system is switched on.
is indirectly routed into the car's interior
Preselecting the reel-on time
Front ventilation On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time

1. "Settings"
▷ Turn knob for continuous opening and clos‐
2. "Climate"
ing of the vents.
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
▷ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the
vent flow, arrow. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes when the system has been switched
on.
141
The system will only be switched on within the

next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
142
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and op‐ ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Compatibility
specific and optional features offered with the If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
series. It also describes features that are not ing or in the instructions of the system
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to to be controlled, the system is generally
the selected options or country versions. This compatible with the Universal Integrated Re‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ mote Control.
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ If you have any questions, please contact:
tive features and systems. ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Universal Integrated Re‐
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
mote Control Corporation.
The concept Overview

The Universal Integrated Remote Control can
operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled
systems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The Universal Integrated Remote Con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the but‐
tons on the interior rearview mirror must be
programmed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol. 1 LED
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored 2 Programmable keys
functions for the sake of security. 3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Information
Programming
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ General information
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage 1. Switch on the ignition.
door, using the universal garage door opener. 2. Initial setup:
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
Press and hold the left and right button on
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
the respective system is clear during program‐
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
143
CONTROLS Interior equipment
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
erases all programming of the buttons on stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
the interior rearview mirror. features an alternating-code system. Flashing
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 peat for approximately 20 seconds.
to 8 cm away from the buttons of the inte‐ For systems with an alternating-code system,
rior rearview mirror. The required distance the Universal Integrated Remote Control and
depends on the manual transmitter. the system also have to be synchronized.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button Please read the operating manual to find out
of the desired function on the hand-held how to synchronize the system.
transmitter and the button to be program‐ Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
med on the interior rearview mirror. The person.
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐
To synchronize:
gin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing mote-controlled system.
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
rior rearview mirror has been programmed. rearview mirror as described.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
60 seconds, change the distance between on the system being programmed. You
the interior rearview mirror and the hand- have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
held transmitter and repeat the step. Sev‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
eral more attempts at different distances interior rearview mirror for approximately
may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
between attempts. repeat this step up to three times in order
Canada: if programming with the hand- to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
held transmitter was interrupted, hold zation is complete, the programmed func‐
down the interior rearview mirror button tion will be carried out.
and repeatedly press and release the hand-
held transmitter button for 2 seconds. Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
The systems can be controlled using the interior button to be programmed.
rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
Special feature of the alternating-code transmitter for the system to be controlled
wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
repeated programming, please check if the sys‐ required distance depends on the manual
tem to be controlled features an alternating- transmitter.
code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
144
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ functions cannot be deleted individually.
mitter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly. Digital compass
The LED flashing faster indicates that the
button on the interior rearview mirror has Overview
been programmed. The system can then be
controlled by the button on the interior
rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance and re‐
peat the step. Several more attempts at dif‐
ferent distances may be necessary. Wait at
least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold 1 Control button
down the interior rearview mirror button
2 Mirror display
and repeatedly press and release the hand-
held transmitter button for 2 seconds.
Mirror display
Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the
WARNING mirror when driving straight.
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage Operating concept
door, using the universal garage door opener. Various functions can be called up by pressing
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ the control button with a pointed object, such
age. Make sure that the area of movement of as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
the respective system is clear during program‐ The following setting options are displayed in
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐ succession, depending on how long the control
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ button is pressed:
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior rear‐ ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
view mirror while the engine is running or ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
when the ignition is started. To do this, hold
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
down the button within receiving range of the
setting.
system until the function is activated. The inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wire‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
less signal is being transmitted.
Setting the compass zones
Deleting stored functions Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ fer to World map with compass zones.
proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
145
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set objects or overhead power lines near the
compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on
mirror. the display. Next, drive in a complete circle
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ at least once at a speed of no more than
pass is ready for use again after approximately 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful,
10 seconds. the "C" is replaced by the points of the
compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control but‐
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
ton again to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
146
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
mately 10 seconds. injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
Sun visor by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀
Glare shield CAUTION
Fold the sun visor down or up.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
Vanity mirror erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ socket cover again after using the socket.◀
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on. Push in the lighter.
The lighter can be removed as
soon as it pops back out.
Ashtray/cigarette
lighter
Overview Connecting electrical de‐
vices
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal cup property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
holders, the cigarette lighter above it in the ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
center console. terminals in the engine compartment.◀
CAUTION
Ashtray If metal objects fall into the socket, they
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash‐ can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
tray from the cupholder. erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Lighter
WARNING
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
Contact with hot heating elements or the of the airbags, e.g. portable navigation devices,
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause etc., can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the be thrown around in the car's interior when un‐
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against folding. There is risk of injuries. make sure that
147
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area USB interface
of unfolding.◀
The concept
Sockets Connection for USB devices with music files and
Sockets can be used for the running electrical for importing data, such as for Personal Profile
devices with the engine running or with the ig‐ settings.
nition switched on. The total load of all sockets
must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Information
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ Observe the following when connecting:
patible connectors.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
In the center console
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB
hubs.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharging
external devices.
Overview
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
In the trunk
The USB interface is located in the front of the

center console.
The socket is located on the right side in the Cargo area

trunk.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is
raised.
148
Information Information
WARNING WARNING
Loose objects in the car's interior can be Danger of jamming with folding down the
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. backrests. There is risk of injuries or risk of
in the event of an accident or during braking property damage. Make sure that the area of
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. movement of the rear backrest is clear prior to
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀ folding down.◀
WARNING
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover can
be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
the tailgate. Make sure that the child restraint system fits
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the left and right. the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
move them.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety belt
is not guaranteed. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. If you are using the middle safety
belt, lock the wider rear backrest.◀
Installing
WARNING
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizontally
into the two side brackets until it audibly Body parts can be jammed when moving
engages. the head restraint. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at
when moving the head restraint.◀
the tailgate.
Enlarging the trunk Folding down side backrests

The rear seat backrests can be folded down
General information from the front or from the trunk.
The trunk can be enlarged by folding down the Before the backrest is folded down, hook the
rear seat backrest. corresponding safety belt into the safety belt
The rear backrest is divided 60–40. The back‐ on the side.
rest of the left seat is connected to the backrest
center section.
149
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
Pull the release upward and fold the backrest

toward the front.
3. Fold back and latch the backrest.
Folding back the backrest

WARNING
With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the car's interior, e.g.
in case of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuver. There is risk of injuries. Make sure that
the backrest engages into the locking after
folding it back.◀
Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch.

Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.
Adjusting the backrest tilt

WARNING
securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust
the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and
move them.◀
To transport bulky items, the trunk can be ex‐

panded by setting the backrests at a steeper
angle.
1. Released the back rest, and tilt it forward.
150
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
tions
specific and optional features offered with the Glove compartment
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Information
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ WARNING
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ Folded open, the glove compartment
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
tive features and systems. glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
Information neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
WARNING ing it.◀
Loose objects in the car's interior can be
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. Opening
in the event of an accident or during braking
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries.
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀
CAUTION
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Pull the handle.

Overview
The light in the glove compartment switches
The following storage compartments are avail‐ on.
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Storage compartment in front of the cu‐ Closing
pholders.
Fold up the cover.
▷ Storage tray in the center console.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐
rest.
151
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Compartments in the Cupholders

doors
Information
WARNING
WARNING
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of
risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of
jects in the car's interior.◀
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
Center armrest cup holder.◀
The center armrest contains a storage compart‐

ment. Front
Opening
In the center console.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm Rear

rest upward, arrow 2.
Adjusting the height
On 3-door models: in front of the rear seats and

in the and in the side armrests.
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center arm

rest upward or downward into the desired
height, arrow 2.
152
Storage space under

cargo floor panel
On 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.
Clothes hooks Located under the cargo floor panel on the

right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle
WARNING tool kit.
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can To remove the onboard vehicle tool kit, fold the
obstruct the view while driving. There is risk of right side of the cargo floor panel upward.
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the hooks, ensure that they will not ob‐
struct the driver's view.◀
Variable trunk floor
WARNING
With the variable trunk floor, the trunk can be
Improper use of the clothes hooks can configured corresponding to transport require‐
lead to a danger of objects flying about during ments. To do this, remove the trunk floor, and
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of insert it in the desired position.
injuries and risk of property damage. Only hang
lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles, from Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer to
the clothes hooks.◀ page 161.
The clothes hooks are located above the side Removing the cargo floor panel
windows in the rear.
On 5-door models: To change the position of

the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear part
of the cargo floor panel.
153
CONTROLS Storage compartments
▷ Always secure cargo against shifting, using

straps, belts and lashing eyes, e.g.◀
Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and fold

slightly upward. Next, pull it backward from the
supports.
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower posi‐
The cargo floor panel can be removed from the tion and push it behind the locks, arrow.
trunk above the tail lamps.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Lower position
Upper position
▷ Larger objects can be transported.

▷ With the backrests folded down, a long, flat
▷ Space for smaller objects remains between loading surface is produced.
the fixed and variable trunk floor.
▷ On 3-door models:
Maximum load in this position:
Folded up position 330 lbs/150 kg.
WARNING ▷ On 5-door models:
Improper use of the variable cargo floor Maximum load in this position:
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying 441 lbs/200 kg.
about during braking and evasive maneuvers.
▷ Space for objects remains between the
There is risk of injuries and risk of property
fixed and variable trunk floor.
damage.
▷ Do not use the variable cargo floor panel to
separate the cargo area and vehicle interior
in the sense of a partition net.
▷ Only use the variable cargo floor in the
folded-up position when the backrests are
folded up and locked.
154
155
DRIVE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and op‐ Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
tions ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
This chapter describes all standard, country- they achieve their full traction potential after a
specific and optional features offered with the break-in time.
series. It also describes features that are not Drive conservatively for the first
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 200 miles/300 km.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
formance between brake discs and brake pads.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Breaking-in period Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
General information level only after a distance driven of approx.
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
other (break-in time). engage the clutch gently.
The following instructions will help accomplish
a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Following part replacement
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control, The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
refer to page 74. served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
Engine, transmission, and axle drive vehicle's operating life.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road General driving notes
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and Closing the tailgate
100 mph/160 km/h. WARNING
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
stances. cle and can endanger occupants and other traf‐
fic participants or damage the vehicle in the
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
increased. the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
158
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be Driving through water

avoided:
CAUTION
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
When driving too quickly through too
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. deep water, water can enter into the engine
▷ Drive moderately. compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is risk of property damage.
Hot exhaust system When driving through water, do not exceed the
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
WARNING
mum speed for driving through water.◀
During driving operation, high tempera‐
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g. Drive through calm water only if it is not deeper
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐ than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is risk of Braking safely
injuries or risk of property damage. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
Do not remove the heat shields installed and feature.
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
that no combustible materials can come in con‐ way of braking in situations needed.
tact with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
idle or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐ any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
haust system.◀ fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
Mobile communication devices in the the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
vehicle active mode.
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
Objects in the movement area around
can influence one another. There is radiation
pedals and floor area
due to the send operations of mobile phones. WARNING
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
mobile phones with direct connections to an There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual vehicle such that they are secured and cannot
disturbance and deflect the radiation from the enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats
car's interior.◀ that are suitable for the vehicle and can be
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose
Hydroplaning floor mats and do not layer several floor mats.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
form between the tires and road surface. the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
e.g. for cleaning.◀
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete
loss of contact between the tires and the road
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle.
159
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion will built up when the maximum

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, pressure applied to the brake pads during brak‐
press brake pedal ever so gently every few ing is not reached - thus discs don't get
miles. cleaned.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
traffic. a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
Condensation under the parked vehicle
In this way braking efficiency will be available
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
when you need it.
densation water develops collecting under‐
neath the vehicle.
Hills
These traces of water under the vehicle are
WARNING normal.
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out Ground clearance
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
CAUTION
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀ If ground clearance is insufficient, there
might be contact with the front or rear spoiler
WARNING e.g. when driving over curbs or entering into
In idle or with the engine switched off, underground car parking garages. There is risk
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not of property damage. Ensure that there is suffi‐
available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the cient ground clearance available.◀
engine or braking force and steering support.
There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
or with the engine switched off.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
160
Loading DRIVING TIPS
Loading
Vehicle features and op‐ Determining the load
tions limit
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
specific and optional features offered with the hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the ve‐
hicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
Information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally, and cause a sudden
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of an
accident. Pay attention to the permitted load 2. Determine the combined weight of the
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐ driver and passengers that will be riding in
mitted gross weight.◀ your vehicle.
CAUTION 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
pounds.
age. There is risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
WARNING pacity.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be For example, if the YYY amount equals
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs pas‐
in the event of an accident or during braking sengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries. available cargo and luggage load capacity
Secure loose objects in the car's interior.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
161
DRIVING TIPS Loading
Load Securing cargo

On 3-door models Information
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or with draw straps.
On 5-door models ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
draw straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Without storage compartment package: to se‐

cure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, ar‐
Stowing cargo row 1, in the cargo area.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the With storage compartment package: to secure
cargo. the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ and 2, in the cargo area.
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not Roof-mounted luggage
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
rack
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests Information
to stow cargo.
Installation only possible with roof rack.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
Roof racks are available as special accessories.
the backrests.
162
Loading DRIVING TIPS
Securing Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
COOPER/COOPER D/ONE/ONE D
rack.
Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect
on vehicle handling and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight. COOPER S/COOPER SD
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with
ratchet straps. The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket,
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening arrow 2, are located below the covers in the
path of the tailgate. bumper.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ Remove the covers before installing the rear
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners luggage rack.
gently.
Power consumption
Before starting to drive, check the function of
Rear luggage rack the tail lamps of the rear luggage rack.
The rear luggage rack lights must not consume
General information more than:
Installation only possible with rear luggage rack ▷ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
preparation.
▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
Rear racks are available as special accessories.
▷ Brake lights: 84 watts in total.
Information ▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts in total.
Follow the installation instructions of the rear ▷ Backup lamp: 42 watts in total.
luggage rack.
Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration
and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
163
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and op‐ Close the windows and
tions glass sunroof
This chapter describes all standard, country- Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
specific and optional features offered with the open results in increased air resistance and
series. It also describes features that are not raises fuel consumption.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ Tires
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
sumption.
General information
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for Check the tire inflation pressure
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ regularly
sions. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ pressure at least twice a month and before
ferent factors. starting on a long trip.
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
ing style and regular maintenance can influ‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ence fuel consumption and environmental im‐ tire wear.
pact.
Drive away without de‐

Remove unnecessary lay
cargo Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the fastest way for the cold engine to
Remove attached parts reach its operating temperature.
following use
Remove roof or rear luggage racks which are Look well ahead when
no longer required following use.
driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
164
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ If the engine is switched off and then restarted
cle driving ahead of you. rather than leaving the engine running con‐
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐
consumption. duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds
of switching off the engine.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
Avoid high engine speeds mined by other factors, such as driving style,
road conditions, maintenance or environmental
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers factors.
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Starting
with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When ac‐ Switch off any functions
celerating, shift up before reaching high engine
speeds.
that are not currently
When you reach the desired speed, shift into needed
the highest applicable gear and drive with the Functions such as seat heating and the rear
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ window defroster require a lot of energy and
stant speed. consume additional fuel, especially in city and
The gear shift indicator, refer to page 82, of stop-and-go traffic.
your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient Therefore, switch off these functions if they are
gear. not actually needed.
Use coasting conditions Have maintenance car‐

When approaching a red light, take your foot ried out
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a
halt. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. MINI
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
formed by a MINI dealer’s service center.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
For information on the MINI Maintenance Sys‐
tems, refer to page 200.
Switch off the engine

during longer stops GREEN mode
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
The concept
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion. The GREEN mode supports a driving style that
saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose,
Auto Start/Stop function the engine control and comfort features, e. g.
the climate control output, are adjusted.
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a For Steptronic transmission:
stop.
165
The Coasting driving condition is enabled under 2. "GREEN Mode"

certain conditions. or
Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
1. "Settings"
matically decoupled from the transmission in
selector lever position D. The vehicle continues 2. "Driving mode"
traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel 3. "Configure GREEN"
consumption. Selector lever position D remains Configure the program.
engaged. An indicator provides information
about the distance traveled in Coasting mode.
GREEN tip
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are ▷ "Tip at:"
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style. Set the GREEN mode speed at which a
GREEN mode tip is to be displayed.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster. ▷ "GREEN speed warning":
Displays a reminder when the set GREEN
Overview mode speed is exceeded.
The system includes the following MINIMAL
functions and displays: Coasting
▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 167. Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 168,
▷ GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to with the engine idling.
page 167.
This function is only available in GREEN mode.
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 166.
▷ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 169. GREEN climate control
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to "GREEN climate control"
page 168. Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
Activating GREEN mode
ture, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling
Turn Driving Dynamics Control to of the car's interior fuel consumption can be
the right until GREEN mode is economized.
displayed in the instrument clus‐
The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior
ter.
Additionally heat output to seats and exterior
mirror is reduced.
Configuring GREEN mode Exterior mirror heat is available when outside

temperatures are very low.
GREEN potential
1. Activating GREEN mode.
The percentage of potential savings that can be
2. "Configure GREEN"
achieved with the current configuration is dis‐
3. Configure the program. played.

1. "Settings"
166
Display in the instrument cluster GREEN tip driving instruction
GREEN bonus range

An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
This may be displayed as the bo‐
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
Instructions tell you to switch to a more fuel-ef‐
time the vehicle is refueled.
ficient driving style when you back off the ac‐
▷ Green display: efficient driving style. celerator.
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by
backing off the accelerator pedal. Information
The driving style display and GREEN mode tips
Driving style in the instrument cluster appear when the
A bar display in the instrument GREEN mode display is activated.
cluster indicates your current Activating driving style and GREEN mode tips:
driving efficiency.
1. "Settings"
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered by 2. "Instrument cluster"
coasting or when braking. 3. "GREEN Info"
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when
accelerating. GREEN tip symbols
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the An additional symbol and text instructions are
bar's color: displayed.
Symbol Measure
▷ Green display: efficient driving style as long
as the mark moves within the green range. For efficient driving back off the ac‐
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
backing off the accelerator pedal. low time to assess road conditions.
The display switches to green as soon as all Reduce speed to the selected GREEN
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving speed.
are met.
Steptronic transmission: switch from
M/S to D or avoid manual shift inter‐
ventions.
167
Symbol Measure idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector

lever position D remains engaged.
Manual transmission: follow shifting
instructions. This driving condition is referred to as coasting.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐
Manual transmission: engage neutral pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to
for engine stop. the transmission again.
Information
Indications on the Control Display Coasting is a component of the GREEN driving
mode, refer to page 165.
MINIMALISM
Coasting is automatically activated when
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐
GREEN mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
ogy can be displayed while driving.
Control, refer to page 117.
1. "Vehicle info" The function is available in a certain speed
2. "MINIMALISM" range.
A proactively driving style helps the driver to
Displaying MINIMALISM info use the function as often as possible and sup‐
The current efficiency can be displayed. ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
"MINIMALISM info"
Safety mode
The following systems are displayed:
The function is not available under one of the
▷ Auto Start/Stop function. following conditions.
▷ Energy recovery. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Climate control output. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
▷ Coasting. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
Displaying GREEN mode tips or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
"GREEN tips" sive current.
Driving instruction and an additional symbol ▷ Cruise control activated.
are displayed.
Settings are stored for the profile currently Functional requirements
used. In GREEN mode, this function is available in a
speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
Coasting prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h,
if the following conditions are met:
The concept ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
The system helps to conserve fuel. operated.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ tion D.
sion when selector lever position D is set. The ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
vehicle continues traveling with the engine temperature.
168
Display MINIMALISM driving style analysis
Display in the instrument cluster The concept

The mark in the bar display be‐ In this situation the system helps develop an
low the tachometer is high‐ especially efficient driving style and to conserve
lighted green and appears at the fuel.
zero point. The tachometer ap‐ For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
proximately indicates idle speed. The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Indications on the Control Display Using this indication, the individual driving style
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
MINIMALISM Info while this driving mode is ac‐ The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.
tive. The range of the vehicle can be extended by an
The distance traveled in the Coasting driving efficient driving style. This gain in range is dis‐
condition is indicated by a counter. played as a bonus range in the instrument clus‐
ter and on the Control Display.
The function is only available in GREEN mode.
Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser

1. Activate GREEN mode.
Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in 2. "MINIMALISM"
the Coasting driving condition. Symbol, ar‐ 3. Select the symbol.
row 2: coasting driving condition.
Display
Displaying MINIMALISM info
Display on the Control Display
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "MINIMALISM"
3. "MINIMALISM info"
Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
ure GREEN mode, refer to page 166, menu,
e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine
when traveling downhill.
Settings are saved for the profile currently be‐ The display of the MINIMALISM Analyser con‐
ing used. sists of a fish, which is riding along in a glass of
water on the roof of the MINI and a table of
values that rates the driving style in various cat‐
169
egories. The bonus range achieved by driving

style that minimizes fuel consumption is dis‐
played below the table of values.
The fish and the movements of the water in the
glass symbolize the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient the driving style, the
less the water sloshes around in the glass and
the better is the fish's mood, arrow 1.
The table of values includes asterisks, arrow 2.
The more efficient the driving style, the more
stars are included in the table and the faster
the bonus range increases, arrow 3.
If by contrast the driving style is inefficient, the
water oscillates, the mood of the fish is sullied
and a reduced number of asterisks is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN
tips are displayed during driving.
Tips about the energy saving driving style, Con‐
serving fuel, refer to page 164.
170
171
MOVE ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and op‐ 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.
tions
tive features and systems. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Information
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 176, prior to refueling.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀ Closing
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
Fuel lid 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Opening The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge jammed and crushed during closing. In this
and open it. case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and fuel
vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of inju‐
ries or risk of property damage. Pay attention
that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.
The release is located in the trunk.
174
Refueling MOBILITY
Remove the cover.

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.
This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following

when refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
On contact with painted surfaces, damage may
occur to these surfaces. The environment is
polluted. There is risk of property damage.
Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks

off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
175
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and op‐ CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
tions wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
specific and optional features offered with the converter is permanently damaged. There is
series. It also describes features that are not risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the following in the case of gasoline engines:
the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
tive features and systems. ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀
Fuel recommendation Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
General information ing.
Depending on the region, many gas stations Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or standards:
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in US: ASTM 4806–xx
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g.
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
Information xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
gine problems, for instance poor engine start- and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
performance. There is risk of property damage. percentage than recommended or one with
In case of engine problems, switch gas stations other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane
rating.◀ Recommended fuel grade
MINI recommends AKI 91.
Gasoline John Cooper Works:
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should MINI recommends AKI 93.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ Minimum fuel grade
taining metal must not be used. MINI recommends AKI 89.
176
Fuel MOBILITY
CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not
comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐

ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting
and stalling, especially under certain environ‐
mental conditions such as high ambient tem‐
perature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.◀
177
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and op‐ Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
tions than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
This chapter describes all standard, country- been parked for at least 2 hours.
specific and optional features offered with the The displays of inflation devices may under-
series. It also describes features that are not read by up to 0.1 bar.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
the selected options or country versions. This inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Moni‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tor.
For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Safety information Checking the inflation pressure of the

emergency wheel
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

WARNING
A tire with low or missing tire inflation
pressure impacts handling, such as steering Located behind the bumper on the underside
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐ of the vehicle is an opening for checking the
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, tire inflation pressure.
and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a month
and before a long trip.◀ Pressure specifications
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐ The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
tion pressure. page 179, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire inflation
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
pressure increases along with the tire's temper‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
ature. The tire inflation pressure specifications
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient
type.
temperature.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
178
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Tire inflation pressure values up to

▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/ On 3-door models: COOPER

160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications in
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for bar/PSI
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure Specifications in
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer bar/PSI with cold
to page 179, and adjust as necessary. tires
175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

+S XL RSC
175/65 R 15 84 H M
+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M
+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H
These pressure values can also be found on the Std
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
195/55 R 16 87 H M
pillar.
+S RSC
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
RSC
Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
179
On 3-door models: COOPER S On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER

WORKS
bar/PSI
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H M 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35

+S RSC 185/50 R 17 86 H M 2.9 /42 2.7 / 39
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S XL RSC
+S A/S RSC 205/45 R 17 88 W
195/55 R 16 87 W XL RSC
RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
+S XL RSC 205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC 205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
On 5-door models: COOPER
RSC Tire size Pressure specifications in
205/40 R 18 86 W XL bar/PSI
RSC Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33

+S A/S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H M
+S Std
175/65 R 15 84 H
Std
195/55 R 16 87 H M
+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
180
Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds

bar/PSI
above 100 mph/160 km/h
205/45 R 17 88 V M 2.5 / 36 2.4 / 35 WARNING
+S XL A/S RSC
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
205/45 R 17 88 V M excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
+S XL RSC and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
205/45 R 17 88 W speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
XL RSC relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
Emergency wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
On 5-door models: COOPER S

bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
195/55 R 16 87 H M 2.5 / 36 2.3 / 33

+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
+S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39

+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
RSC
181
Tire inflation pressure values over On 3-door models: COOPER S

100 mph/160 km/h
bar/PSI
On 3-door models: COOPER
Specifications in
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI with cold
bar/PSI
tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires 195/55 R 16 87 H M 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
+S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 V M
175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38 +S A/S RSC
+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 W
175/65 R 15 84 H M RSC
+S Std
175/60 R 16 86 H M 3.1 / 45 2.9 /42
175/65 R 15 84 H
+S XL RSC
Std
205/45 R 17 88 V M
175/60 R 16 86 H M
+S XL A/S RSC
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
195/55 R 16 87 H M
+S XL RSC
+S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
195/55 R 16 87 V M
RSC
+S A/S RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL
RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
182
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER On 5-door models: COOPER

WORKS
bar/PSI
bar/PSI
Specifications in
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold
bar/PSI with cold tires
tires
175/65 R 15 84 H M 2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38

185/50 R 17 86 H 3.1 / 45 2.9 /42 +S A/S Std
M+S XL RSC 175/65 R 15 84 H M
205/45 R 17 88 W +S Std
XL RSC 175/65 R 15 84 H
205/45 R 17 88 V M Std
+S XL A/S RSC 195/55 R 16 87 H M
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S RSC
+S XL RSC 195/55 R 16 87 V M
205/40 R 18 86 W 3.4 / 49 3.2 / 46 +S A/S RSC
XL RSC 195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W
XL RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41

+S XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W
XL RSC
Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of

T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60
183
On 5-door models: COOPER S V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
bar/PSI Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire Identification Number
tires DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
195/55 R 16 87 H M 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41 xxx: tire size and tire design

+S RSC 0115: tire age
195/55 R 16 87 V M Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
+S A/S RSC the U.S. Department of Transportation.
195/55 R 16 87 W
RSC Tire age
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the
175/60 R 16 86 H M 3.1 / 45 3.1 / 45 1st week of 2015.
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M Recommendation
+S XL A/S RSC Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
205/45 R 17 88 V M least every 6 years.
+S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XL Uniform Tire Quality Grading
RSC Quality grades can be found where applicable
205/40 R 18 86 W XL on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
RSC and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA;
Temperature A
Tire identification marks DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear
Tire size
Traction AA A B C
205/45 R 17 84 V
Temperature A B C
205: nominal width in mm
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
45: aspect ratio in %
Safety Requirements in addition to these
R: radial tire code grades.
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires Treadwear
F: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Speed letter under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h well on the government course as a tire graded
184
100. The relative performance of tires depends RSC – Run-flat tires

upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 187, are labeled
ever, and may depart significantly from the with a circular symbol containing the letters
norm due to variations in driving habits, service RSC marked on the sidewall.
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate. M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Traction
weather performance than summer tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop Tire tread
on wet pavement as measured under control‐
led conditions on specified government test Summer tires
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
C may have poor traction performance.
0.12 in/3 mm.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
does not include acceleration, cornering, hy‐
droplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Winter tires
Temperature Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
0.16 in/4 mm.
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate less suitable for winter operation.
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Minimum tread depth
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi‐
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
WARNING circumference and have the legally required
The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ They are marked on the side of the tire with
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.◀
185
Tire damage Changing wheels and

tires
General information
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign ob‐ Mounting
jects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
Information qualified service center or repair shop.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can Wheel and tire combination
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
other qualified service center or repair shop
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
about the right wheel/tire combination and
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low- Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair
profile tires. the function of a variety of systems such as ABS
or DSC.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions: To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
figuration from a single manufacturer.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Following tire damage, have the original wheel
dency to pull to the left or right.
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over as soon as possible.
curbs, road damage, or similar things.
WARNING
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐ for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to
There is risk of an accident. If tire damage is tolerances despite the same official size rating.
suspected while driving, immediately reduce There is risk of an accident.◀
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the
Recommended tire brands
nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres‐
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control.
There is risk of an accident. Do not repair dam‐
aged tires, but have them replaced.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐

hicle recommends certain tire brands. These
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.
186
New tires Rotating wheels between axles

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ Different wear patterns can occur on the front
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; and rear axles depending on individual driving
they achieve their full traction potential after a conditions.
break-in time. The tires can be rotated between the axles to
Drive conservatively for the first achieve even wear. A dealer’s service center or
200 miles/300 km. another qualified service center or repair shop
will be glad to answer additional questions at
Retreaded tires any time.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ After rotating, check the tire pressure and cor‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires. rect if needed.
WARNING
Storage
Retreated tires can have different tire
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
as little exposure to light as possible.
ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀ Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels.
Winter tires Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
Run-flat tires
do not provide the same level of performance
as winter tires. Label
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed. RSC label on the tire sidewall.
The wheels are composed of tires that are self-
Run-flat tires supporting to a limited degree.
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐
own safety you should replace them only with main drivable to a restricted degree in the
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
case of a flat tire. A dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to
will be glad to answer additional questions at page 107.
any time.
187
Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to Information

page 104. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
Changing run-flat tires sealant container.
For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
dealer’s service center or another qualified 1/8 in/4 mm or more.
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
swer additional questions at any time.
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
Repairing a flat tire that have penetrated the tire.
Safety measures ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
wheel.
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by electronics checked at the next opportunity
setting the parking brake. and have them replaced if needed.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
DANGER
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
such as behind a guardrail.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of the
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the ex‐
appropriate distance. haust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀
Mobility System Storage

The Mobility System is located under the cargo
The concept floor panel.
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
inside.
The compressor can be used to check the tire
inflation pressure.
188
Sealant container Filling the tire with sealant

1. Shake the sealant container.
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 2. Take the connection hose completely out of
Observe use-by date on the sealant container. the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐

1 On/off switch tor of the sealant container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
189
4. Slide the sealant container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, switch on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
valve of the nonworking wheel. tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor
at this point.
CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached:
hicle.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive forward and back to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Remove the connection hose of the sealant
container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the seal‐
ant container.
190
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket in‐
nection hose in suitable material to avoid side the vehicle.
dirtying the trunk.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 mls/10 km/h to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar.
12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
turned on or the engine running, switch
To correct the tire inflation pressure on the compressor.
1. Stop at a suitable location. ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ton on the compressor.
valve stem.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed
of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 106.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 102.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the possible.
compressor.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
191
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 175/65 R 15.
▷ 175/60 R 16.
John Cooper Works:
▷ 185/50 R 17.
Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always suf‐
ficiently tight. Retighten as needed according
to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
192
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine comp.
1 Washer fluid reservoir 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
193
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Hood Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Information Hood is unlocked.
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage components and
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents or
risk of property damage.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components can
move in the engine compartment with the ve‐ 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
hicle switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. There is again, arrow 2.
risk of injuries. Do not reach into the area of
Hood can be opened.
moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair
away from moving parts.◀
Indicator/warning lights
CAUTION When the hood is opened, a Check Control
Folded-away wipers can be jammed message is displayed.
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with Closing the hood
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀
WARNING Let the hood fall from approx. 16 in/40 cm, ar‐
An incorrectly locked hood can open row.
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
194
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
Vehicle features and op‐ Electronic oil measure‐
tions ment
Status display
The concept
the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ while driving and shown on the Control Display.
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ level, a check control message is displayed.
Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
General information prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
displayed.
the driving style and driving conditions.
With frequent short-distance trips, perform a
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
detailed measurement.
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Break-in of the engine. On the Control Display:
▷ Idling of the engine.
1. "Vehicle info"
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not ap‐
2. "Vehicle status"
proved.
3. "Engine oil level"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling.
Engine oil level display messages
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
Different messages appear on the display de‐
measurement.
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ to these messages.
uring principles:
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
▷ Status display. 125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
▷ Detailed measurement. page 196.
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
mediately add engine oil.◀
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
195
MOBILITY Engine oil
CAUTION Adding engine oil

Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of Information
property damage. Do not add too much engine
CAUTION
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified A too low engine oil level causes engine
service center or repair shop.◀ damage. There is risk of property damage.
Add engine oil within the next
Detailed measurement 125 miles/200 km.◀
CAUTION
The concept
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
In the detailed measurement the engine oil
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
level is checked and displayed via a scale.
property damage. Do not add too much engine
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
level, a check control message is displayed. dealer’s service center or another qualified
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ service center or repair shop.◀
creased somewhat.
WARNING
Requirements Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
▷ Vehicle is on level road. coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
Observe the instructions on the containers.
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not
Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
depressed.
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐ erating materials into different bottles. Store
lector lever position N or P and accelerator operating materials out of reach of children.◀
pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ General information
perature.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
Performing a detailed measurement
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
On the Control Display: played in the instrument cluster.
1. "Vehicle info" Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐
2. "Vehicle status" cle before engine oil is added.
3. "Measure engine oil level"

Overview
4. "Start measurement"
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
The engine oil level is checked and displayed partment, refer to page 193.
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute. Opening the oil filler neck
1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.
196
Engine oil MOBILITY
2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise, Gasoline engine

arrow.
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐

ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
3. Add motor oil. Alternative engine oil types

After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐ If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
ment, refer to page 196. not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Engine oil types to add Gasoline engine
Information API SL or superior oil rating
CAUTION
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use oil
Engine oil change
additives.◀ CAUTION
CAUTION Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
thus engine damage. There is risk of property
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk of
damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
property damage. When selecting an engine
cated in the vehicle.◀
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀ The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the dealer’s service center or another
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
qualified service center or repair shop change
engine.
the motor oil.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, SAE
5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20.
Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:
197
MOBILITY Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and op‐ The coolant reservoir is in the engine compart‐
ment, refer to page 193.
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Checking
specific and optional features offered with the There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
series. It also describes features that are not coolant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ sure to dissipate, then open it.
Information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀
3. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
WARNING the minimum and maximum marks in the
filler neck.
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of in‐
juries and risk of property damage. Avoid the
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Coolant level
Overview
Opening the hood, refer to page 194
198
Coolant MOBILITY
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
199
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and op‐ Detailed information on service requirements,
refer to page 81, can be displayed on the Con‐
tions trol Display.
specific and optional features offered with the Service data in the remote control
series. It also describes features that are not Information on the required maintenance is
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to continuously stored in the remote control. The
the selected options or country versions. This dealer’s service center can read this data out
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ for your vehicle.
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
tive features and systems. control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
MINI maintenance system Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
The maintenance system indicates required
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
count.
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
rately. Further information is available from a
Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for
Condition Based Service US models and Warranty
CBS and Service Guide Book‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ let for Canadian models
count the driving conditions of your vehicle.
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
The system makes it possible to adapt the
for additional information on service require‐
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
ments.
user profile.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
200
Maintenance MOBILITY
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, seri‐
tained. ous engine misfiring within a brief period
can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con‐
Socket for OBD Onboard verter.
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly recommends ac‐
cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos‐
sible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfir‐
ing in the engine.
201
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle features and op‐ Wiper blade replacement
tions
Information
CAUTION
series. It also describes features that are not If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
the selected options or country versions. This shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of prop‐
Onboard vehicle tool kit erty damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
Replacing the front wiper blades

1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the

trough under the trunk floor.
3. Pull the wiper blade down first out of the

holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.

To remove, loosen the brackets.
202
Replacing components MOBILITY
Then pull the wiper blade free from the dealer’s service center or another qualified
holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2. service center or repair shop if you are unfami‐
liar with it or if it has not been described here.
A spare lamp box is available from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Information
Lights and bulbs

WARNING
4. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re‐ Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐
verse order. tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is
5. Fold down the wipers. risk of injuries. Only change bulbs after they
have cooled off.◀
Replace rear wiper blade
WARNING
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
Work on switched-on lighting systems
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. can cause short circuits. There is risk of injuries
or risk of property damage. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
CAUTION
Contaminated bulbs reduce their service
life. There is risk of property damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the
3. Continue turning the wiper blade all the
bulb by its base.◀
way so that it pops out of the holder.
4. Press the new wiper blade into the holder
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
until you hear it snap into place.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
5. Fold the wipers in.
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
Lamp and bulb replace‐ as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
ment
WARNING
General information Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
to vehicle safety.
or other light sources for an extended period of
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀
that you have appropriate work performed by a
203
Headlight glass LED headlights

Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
driving with the lights switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
light glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐ 1 Daytime running lights
ter or repair shop.
2 Low beams/high beams
Front lights, bulb replacement 3 Turn signal
Overview Bug light
Halogen headlights
1 Parking lights
2 Daytime running lights
1 Low beams/high beams
3 Fog lights
2 Turn signal
LED bug light
1 Parking lights
2 Fog lights
204
LED low beams/LED high beams Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on lights and Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 203. bulbs, refer to page 203.
The lights feature LED technology. Contact a Bulbs: PW24W
dealer’s service center or another qualified With white turn signal lights: PWY24W
service center or repair shop in the event of a
malfunction. 1. Turn the steering wheel.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and
Halogen low beams/halogen high remove.
beams
Follow the general instructions on lights and
bulbs, refer to page 203.
Bulbs: H4
1. Open the hood, refer to page 194.

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow, and
remove.
3. Unscrew the inner lid counterclockwise,

and remove it.
3. Pull off the connector.

4. Unclip spring clip, arrow, and fold down.
4. Pull bulb holder out of the bulb housing; if

needed, loosen it with small tilting move‐
ments if possible.
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight hous‐

ing.
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
the reverse order.
205
5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture. bulb holder, arrow 2, and remove the
6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in bulb holder.
the reverse order. For better accessibility, if needed, re‐
move the bulb of the fog lamp before‐
LED parking lights/LED fog lights hand.
Follow the general instructions on lights and ▷ Turn the fog light bulb holder counter-
bulbs, refer to page 203. clockwise, arrow 3, and remove.
The lights feature LED technology. Contact a
malfunction.
Parking lights/fog lights/daytime

running lights
Bulbs: 5. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
▷ Parking lights for halogen headlights: W5W 6. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in
Parking lights for LED headlights: W5W NBV the reverse order.
▷ Daytime running light: PSX24W The daytime running lights bulb holder en‐
gages audibly, first below, then above.
▷ Fog lamp: H8
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Replacing the bulbs
1. Turn the steering wheel. Overview
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and
remove. Vehicles with a rear fog lamp
3. Remove the corresponding connector. 1 Side tail lights

4. Remove the bulb holder. 2 Rear fog lamp
▷ Turn the parking light bulb holder coun‐ 3 License plate lamp
ter-clockwise, arrow 1, and remove. 4 Center brake lamp
▷ Press together the upper and lower
locking of the daytime running lights
206
Vehicle with two rear fog lights 3 Brake light

4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights

Bulbs: P21W
1. Open tailgate, refer to page 40.
2. Remove left or right cover.
1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate lamp
4 Center brake lamp
Side tail lights
3. Through the opening, loosen the plug con‐

nector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.
Press the latches together, arrows 1, and
remove the bulb holder.
1 Brake lights/tail lights

2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights
Side LED tail lights
4. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.

5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights
▷ Arrow 2: turn signal
1 Tail lights
2 Turn signal
207
▷ Arrow 3: reversing light 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the

new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
4. Replace nonworking bulb.
Central brake lamp and license plate
5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
lamp
order of removal.
bulbs, refer to page 203. Vehicle with two rear fog lights
The lights feature LED technology. Contact a Follow the general instructions on Lights and
dealer’s service center or another qualified bulbs, refer to page 203.
Bulbs: W16W
malfunction.
Left rear fog lamp:
Vehicles with a rear fog lamp 1. On vehicles with heat shield:
Follow the general instructions on Lights and Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
Bulbs: W16W
1. On vehicles with heat shield:
Loosen 3 screws, arrow.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the

bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog lamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove.
2. Push the heat shield forward and the
bumper back in order to be able to reach
the fog lamp.
208
The wire is long enough to guide the socket ▷ With white lens: WY5W diadem
down and through between any heat shield 1. Open the hood. The covers of the side turn
that may be installed and the bumper. signal lights are on the left and right next to
the hinges of the hood.

5. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse 2. Loosen nuts of the cover by hand and re‐
order of removal. move the cover.
Right fog lamp:
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
The wire is long enough to guide the socket
down and through between any heat shield
that may be installed and the bumper.
3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and

remove.

3. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement

4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
order of removal. Insert the nuts of the
Bulbs: cover and press down.
▷ With orange lens: W5W
209
Changing wheels vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the

side.
Information ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire
reach its carrying capacity because of the
does not need to be changed immediately in
restricted height.
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
Which is why no spare tire is available.
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐
The tools for changing wheels are available as wise, a fatal hazard exists.
accessories from your dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop. Information
Jacking points for the vehicle jack WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the ve‐
hicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
Removing the emergency wheel

The emergency wheel is housed in a well on
the underbody of the vehicle. The screw con‐
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ nection of the emergency wheel is in the cargo
cated at the positions shown. area underneath the floor mat, on the floor of
the storage compartment for the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit.
Emergency wheel
1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench
Safety measures from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
position P P.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
2. Remove the retaining plate.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the
210
3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread Jacking up the vehicle
and hold in place with one hand. 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle
jacking point with the entire surface on the
ground.
4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer‐

gency wheel well using the hexagon at‐
tached to retaining plate.
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐

gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
ing it up.
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts
off of the ground.
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.
5. Lower the emergency wheel with the wheel
1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove
wrench.
the wheel.
6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel un‐ and screw in at least two bolts.
der the vehicle toward the rear.
If original MINI light alloy wheels are not
8. Remove the spacer and emergency wheel mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also
from the well. have to be used.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle. 3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
Prepare wheel change
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to jack.
page 210.
2. With the wheel chock from the onboard ve‐ After the wheel change
hicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle against 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
rolling away at the front wheel of the oppo‐ ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
site side. For this, place the wheel chock
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk.
behind the front wheel diagonally across.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored in
3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
the emergency wheel bracket because of
its size.
211
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ Battery replacement

portunity and correct as needed.
CAUTION
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
page 106.
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer functions.There is risk of property damage. In‐
to page 103. formation on the compatible vehicle batteries is
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight available at your dealer's service center.◀
with a calibrated torque wrench.
After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
Driving with emergency wheel battery be registered on the vehicle by a
WARNING dealer’s service center or another qualified
The emergency wheel has particular di‐ service center or repair shop to ensure that all
mensions. When driving with an emergency comfort features are fully available and that
wheel, changed driving properties may occur at any Check Control messages of these comfort
higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability when features are no longer displayed.
braking, longer braking distance and changed
self-steering properties in the limit area. There Charging the battery
is risk of an accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.◀ General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently
After the trip with emergency wheel charged to guarantee that the battery remains
usable for its full service life.
Have the following work performed by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
center or repair shop. lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
1. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
drives.
sible.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged peri‐
2. Replace the emergency wheel with a new
ods, longer than a month.
wheel.
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
3. Have the tray with the emergency wheel
long periods of time in selector lever posi‐
installed.
tion D, R or N.
Information
Vehicle battery
CAUTION
Maintenance Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
The battery is maintenance-free.
which means that the 12V on-board network
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
service life of the battery. property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
More information about the battery can be re‐ ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ terminals in the engine compartment.◀
212
Starting aid terminals Replacing fuse

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the The fuses are located in the passenger footwell
starting aid terminals, refer to page 215, in the under the dashboard.
engine compartment with the engine off.
1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
tings updated, e. g.:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability
of the navigation.
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐ 2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.
tions again. Information on the fuse types and locations
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to is found on a separate sheet.
page 48. 3. Replace the fuse in question.
4. The installation is done in reverse order
Disposing of old batteries
from the removal.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
fied service center or repair shop or
take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating.◀
213
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and op‐ Warning triangle
tions
tive features and systems. The warning triangle is located in the tailgate.
To remove, loosen the brackets.
Hazard warning flash‐

ers First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located in the trunk.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents reg‐
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Jump-starting
General information
The button is located above the Control Dis‐
play. If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle and
two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not touch any components
that are under voltage.◀
To prevent personal injury or damage to both

vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
214
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property damage.
Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This informa‐
tion can be found on the battery. The body ground acts as the negative terminal
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ of the battery.
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power Connecting the cables
consumers in both vehicles. 1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
Starting aid terminals jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
WARNING battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
If the jumper cables are connected in the terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the cor‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the
rect order during connection.◀ battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine
Starting the engine
compartment acts as the battery's positive ter‐
minal. Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
Open the lid of the starting aid terminal. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making another
attempt in order to allow the discharged
battery to recharge.
215
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. Tow truck

4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
Tow-starting and towing

Information
WARNING
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
Due to system limits, individual functions with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, CAUTION
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐ When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting
ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switch or body and chassis parts; damage can occur
all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow- on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐
starting/towing.◀ age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀
Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to

Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐
page 108.
sitioning the vehicle.
Steptronic transmission: transporting Manual transmission

your vehicle
Observe before towing your vehicle
Information
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Your vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
Towing
CAUTION
CAUTION
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
ing the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be moved or
risk of property damage. Have vehicle trans‐
towed. There is risk of property damage. The
ported only with lifted front axle or on a load‐
vehicle should only be transported on a loading
ing platform.◀
platform.◀
Information the following instructions:

▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on;
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
216
needs to be applied when braking and CAUTION

steering. If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐ correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
quired. cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will ting.◀
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
sponse. pending on local regulations.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
30 mph/50 km/h. identify the vehicle being towed by placing
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
30 miles/50 km. dow.
Tow truck Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed. Tow rope
CAUTION When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting that the tow rope is taut.
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐ the vehicle components when towing, always
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀ use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
CAUTION
Towing other vehicles If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc‐
Information cur. There is risk of property damage. Correctly
WARNING attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fit‐
ting.◀
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
217
Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
COOPER/COOPER D
ONE/ONE D
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the MINI.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
refer to page 202, are together in the cargo
area.
Information
CAUTION COOPER S/COOPER SD
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀
Use of the tow fitting:

▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for JOHN COOPER WORKS
positioning the vehicle.
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., the front and rear of the vehicle on the right
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. side with respect to the direction of travel.
Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
218
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to

the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 214. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the engine
is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.
2. Ignition, refer to page 62, on.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the
pedal. After the engine starts, immediately
press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
219
MOBILITY Care
Care
Vehicle features and op‐ ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
tions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Automatic car washes
series. It also describes features that are not Information
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
the selected options or country versions. This those that use soft brushes in order to
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ avoid paint damage.
tems. The respectively applicable country provi‐ ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
sions must be observed when using the respec‐ damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
of the vehicle.
Car washes ▷ Unscrew the rod antenna.
General information ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to

page 69, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
vation.
in the area below the windshield when the
hood is raised. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
be triggered by the interior motion sensor
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
of the alarm system. Follow the instructions
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to
age the vehicle.
page 44.
Steam jets or high-pressure washers CAUTION

Too high guide rails in car washes can
Information damage body parts. There is risk of property
CAUTION damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high. There Before driving into a car wash
is risk of property damage. Maintain sufficient In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
distance and do not spray too long continu‐ car wash, take the following steps:
ously. Follow the user's manual for the high- Manual transmission:
pressure washer.◀
1. Drive into the car wash.
Distances and temperature 2. Shift to neutral.
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. 3. Switch the engine off.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, 4. Switch on the ignition.
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
220
Care MOBILITY
Steptronic transmission: smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper

blade wear.
1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
3. Make sure that the parking brake is re‐ Vehicle care
leased.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the Car care products
engine. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
In this way, the ignition remains switched using care and cleaning products from MINI.
on, and two Check-Control messages are
WARNING
displayed.
Cleansers can contain substances that are
A signal sounds when you leave the vehicle
dangerous and harmful to your health. There is
while in selector lever position N.
risk of injuries. When cleaning the interior, open
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
when in selector lever position N. A signal is tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the instruc‐
sounded when an attempt is made to lock the tions on the container.◀
vehicle.
To start the engine with manual transmission: Vehicle paint
1. Press on the clutch pedal. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
sion: fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
1. Depress the brake pedal. quency and extent of your car care to these
influences.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
Headlights grease or bird droppings must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
tered or discolored.
acidic cleansers.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., Leather care
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
Remove dust from the leather often, using a
with water.
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
ice scraper.
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
After washing the vehicle
surface.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
To guard against discoloration, such as from
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
two months.
discs can occur.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
more visible.
221
MOBILITY Care
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and cleaning, use only water and suitable care
grease will gradually break down the protective products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
layer of the leather surface. ommends original MINI care products.
Suitable care products are available from a Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
dealer’s service center or another qualified care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
service center or repair shop. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
Upholstery material care noises.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Fine wood parts
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
with a suitable interior cleaner. nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
Plastic components
terial vigorously.
These include:
CAUTION
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
▷ Roofliner.
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐ ▷ Lamp lenses.
cro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Caring for special components ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Dampen cloth lightly with water.
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not soak the roofliner.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam CAUTION
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions. Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease re‐
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents movers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent There is risk of property damage. Clean with a
components, such as the brake disk. microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly with wa‐
ter.◀
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
Safety belts
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
ularly when they have been exposed to road thus have a negative impact on safety.
salt. WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
Rubber components belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the
Environmental influences can cause surface safety belts. There is risk of injuries or danger to
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
222
Care MOBILITY
life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning CAUTION

the safety belts.◀ The surface of displays can be damaged
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
belts clipped into their buckles. erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of
Carpets and floor mats the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber
WARNING cloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens,
refer to page 90.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in the
Long-term
vehicle such that they are secured and cannot When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats three months, special measures must be taken.
that are suitable for the vehicle and can be Further information is available from a dealer’s
safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose service center or another qualified service cen‐
floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. ter or repair shop.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐
curely fastened again after they were removed,
e.g. for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
CAUTION
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of displays
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
223
FIND ME.

AT A GLANCE
CONTROLS
DRIVING TIPS
MOBILITY
REFERENCE

REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
Information
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on labels on
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, service center or another qualified service cen‐
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ter or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific The information in the vehicle documents al‐
measurement method. Detailed values can be ways has priority.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1,727
Height inches/mm 55.7/1,414
Length
Cooper inches/mm 151.1/3,837
Cooper S inches/mm 151.9/3,858
John Cooper Works inches/mm 152.5/3,874
Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8
226
Technical data REFERENCE
MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1,932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1,727
Height inches/mm 56.1/1,425
Length
Cooper inches/mm 157.4/3,998
Cooper S inches/mm 158.0/4,013
Wheelbase inches/mm 101.1/2,567
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.2/11.02
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehicles the slash apply to vehicles with Steptronic
with manual transmission; the values following transmission.
MINI Cooper, 3-door
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 3,455/3,520

kg 1,567/1,597
Load lbs 680

kg 308
Approved front axle load lbs 1,920/1,990

kg 871/903
Approved rear axle load lbs 1,665

kg 755
Approved roof load capacity lbs 132

kg 60
Cargo area capacity cu ft 8.7–34.0

Liters 211–731
227
MINI Cooper, 5-door

kg 1,669/1,701
Load lbs 775

kg 352

kg 905/937

kg 835

kg 75

Liters 278–941
MINI Cooper S, 3-door

kg 1,642/1,656
Load lbs 775/770

kg 352/349

kg 919/934

kg 767

kg 60

Liters 211–731
228
Technical data REFERENCE
MINI Cooper S, 5-door

kg 1,751/1,769
Load lbs 885/885

kg 401/401

kg 946/964

kg 853

kg 75

Liters 278–941
MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door

kg 1,687/1,708
Load lbs 775

kg 352

kg 937/955

kg 782

kg 60

Liters 246–963
229
Capacities
MINI
Fuel tank, approx. Fuel quality, refer to

page 176
Cooper US gal/liters 11.6/44
Cooper S, John Cooper Works US gal/liters 11.6/44
230
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Active pedestrian protec‐

tion system
Opposite to the description in this Owner's
Manual, the active pedestrian protection sys‐
tem is only deployed at speeds between ap‐
prox. 30 km/h/approx. 18 mph and 55 km/h/
34 mph.
231
REFERENCE
232
REFERENCE
233
REFERENCE
234
REFERENCE
235
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All around the roofliner 17 B
All around the steering
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ wheel 14 Backrest curvature, refer to
tem 115 All-season tires, see Winter Lumbar support 50
Acceleration Assistant, refer to tires 187 Band-aids, see First-aid
Launch Control 74 Alternating-code hand-held kit 214
ACC, see camera-based cruise transmitter 144 Bar for tow-starting/
control 119 Alternative oil types 197 towing 217
Activated-charcoal filter 141 Antifreeze, washer fluid 70 Battery replacement, vehicle
Active Cruise Control, see Antilock Brake System, battery 212
camera-based cruise con‐ ABS 115 Battery, vehicle 212
trol 119 Anti-slip control, see DSC 115 Belts, safety belts 51
Additives, oil 197 Approved axle load 227 Beverage holder, cu‐
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Arrival time 85 pholder 152
straints 49 Ash tray 147 Bonus range, GREEN
Adjustments, steering Assistance when driving mode 167
wheel 57 off 118 Bottle holder, see Cu‐
After washing vehicle 221 Assist system, see Intelligent pholder 152
Airbags 99 Safety 108 Brake assistant 115
Airbags, indicator/warning AUTO intensity 139 Brake discs, break-in 158
light 100 Automatic car wash 220 Brake pads, break-in 158
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Automatic climate con‐ Braking, hints 159
culated-air mode 140 trol 138 Breakdown assistance 214
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 55 Break-in 158
lated-air mode 137 Automatic deactivation, Front- Brightness of Control Dis‐
Air conditioner 136 seat passenger airbags 101 play 88
Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ Automatic headlight con‐ Bug light 204
ing function 137, 139 trol 95 Bulb replacement 203
Air distribution, Automatic locking 43 Bulb replacement, front 204
manual 137, 140 Automatic recirculated-air Bulb replacement, rear 206
Air flow, air conditioner 137 control 140 Bulb replacement, side 209
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic transmission with Bulbs and lights 203
control 140 Steptronic 71 Button, Start/Stop 62
Air pressure, tires 178 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ Bypassing, see Jump-start‐
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ mate control 139 ing 214
tion 141 AUTO program, intensity 139
Alarm system 43 Auto Start/Stop function 64 C
Alarm triggering 43 Average fuel consumption 85
Alarm, unintentional 44 Average speed 85 California Proposition 65
All around the center con‐ Axle loads, weights 227 Warning 8
sole 16
236
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Camera-based cruise con‐ Children, seating position 58 Control Display 18

trol 119 Children, transporting Control Display, settings 87
Camera lenses, care 223 safely 58 Controller 19
Camera, rearview cam‐ Child restraint fixing sys‐ Control systems, driving stabil‐
era 130 tem 58 ity 115
Can holder, see Cu‐ Child restraint fixing system Convenient opening 38
pholder 152 LATCH 60 Coolant 198
Car battery 212 Child restraint fixing systems, Cooling function 137, 139
Car care products 221 mounting 59 Cooling, maximum 139
Care, displays 223 Child safety locks 61 Cooling system 198
Care, vehicle 221 Child seat, mounting 59 Cornering lamp 96
Cargo area 148 Child seats 58 Corrosion on brake discs 160
Cargo area, adapting size 153 Chrome parts, care 222 Cosmetic mirror 147
Cargo area, enlarging 149 Chrono package, cockpit 92 Courtesy lamps during unlock‐
Cargo area lid 40 Cigarette lighter 147 ing 37
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Cleaning, displays 223 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐
ments 153 Climate control 136, 138 cle locked 38
Cargo cover 148 Clock 80 Cruise control 124
Cargo, securing 162 Closing/opening via door Cruise control, active 119
Cargo straps, securing lock 39 Cruising range 81
cargo 162 Closing/opening with remote Cupholder 152
Car key, see Remote con‐ control 37 Current fuel consumption 81
trol 34 Clothes hooks 153
Carpet, care 223 Coasting 168 D
Car wash 220 Coasting with engine decou‐
Catalytic converter, see Hot pled, coasting 168 Damage, tires 186
exhaust system 159 Coasting with idling en‐ Damping control, dy‐
CBS Condition Based Serv‐ gine 168 namic 117
ice 200 Combination switch, see Turn Data, technical 226
Center armrest 152 signals 67 Date 80
Center console 16 Combi switch, see wiper sys‐ Daytime running lights 96
Central instrument cluster, tem 68 Defrosting, refer to defrosting
LED ring 88 Comfort Access 41 the windows 137
Central locking system 40 Compartments in the Defrosting, see Windows, de‐
Central screen, refer to Control doors 152 frosting 140
Display 18 Compass 145 Defrosting the windows 137
Changes, technical, refer to Compressor 188 Dehumidifying, air 137, 139
Own Safety 7 Condensation on win‐ Deleting personal data 24
Changing parts 202 dows 140 Deletion of personal data 24
Changing wheels 210 Condensation under the vehi‐ Destination distance 85
Changing wheels/tires 186 cle 160 Digital clock 80
Chassis number, see vehicle Condition Based Service Digital compass 145
identification number 10 CBS 200 Dimensions 226
Check Control 76 Configuring driving pro‐ Dimmable exterior mirrors 56
Checking the oil level elec‐ gram 118 Dimmable interior rearview
tronically 195 Confirmation signal 43 mirror 56
237
Direction indicator, see Turn E Equipment, interior 143

signals 67 Error displays, see Check Con‐
Display, electronic, instrument Electronic displays, instrument trol 76
cluster 76 cluster 76 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
Display, engine tempera‐ Electronic oil measure‐ gram, see DSC 115
ture 85 ment 195 Exchanging wheels/tires 186
Display lighting, see Instru‐ Electronic Stability Program Exhaust system 159
ment lighting 97 ESP, see DSC 115 Exterior mirror, automatic
Displays 75 Emergency detection, remote dimming feature 56
Displays, cleaning 223 control 35 Exterior mirrors 55
Disposal, coolant 199 Emergency release, fuel filler External start 214
Disposal, vehicle battery 213 flap 174 External temperature dis‐
Distance control, see PDC 126 Emergency start function, en‐ play 80
Distance to destination 85 gine start 35 External temperature warn‐
Divided screen view, split Emergency wheel, compact ing 80
screen 23 wheel, refer to Emergency Eyes for securing cargo 162
Door lock, see Remote con‐ wheel 210
trol 34 Energy Control 81 F
Drive mode, GREEN Engine, automatic Start/Stop
mode 165 function 64 Failure message, see Check
Drive-off assistant 118 Engine, automatic switch- Control 76
Drive-off assistant, see off 64 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐
DSC 115 Engine compartment 193 tional alarm 44
Driving Dynamics Control 117 Engine compartment, working Fan, refer to Air flow 137
Driving Excitement, SPORT 86 in 194 Fan, see Air flow 140
Driving instruction, GREEN Engine coolant 198 Favorites buttons, onboard
mode 167 Engine idling when driving, monitor 24
Driving instructions, break- coasting 168 Filler neck for engine oil 196
in 158 Engine oil 195 Fine wood, care 222
Driving mode 117 Engine oil, adding 196 First-aid kit 214
Driving notes, general 158 Engine oil additives 197 Fitting for towing, see tow fit‐
Driving stability control sys‐ Engine oil change 197 ting 218
tems 115 Engine oil filler neck 196 Flat tire, changing wheels 210
Driving style analysis 169 Engine oil types, alterna‐ Flat Tire Monitor FTM 106
Driving tips 158 tive 197 Flat tire, repairing 188
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Engine oil types, suitable 197 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor
trol 115 Engine start during malfunc‐ TPM 102
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ tion 35 Flat tire, warning
trol 116 Engine start, jump-start‐ lamp 103, 106
Dynamic Damping Con‐ ing 214 Flooding 159
trol 117 Engine start, refer to Starting Floor carpet, care 223
Dynamic Stability Control the engine 63 Floor mats, care 223
DSC 115 Engine stop 63 Fogged up windows 137
Dynamic Traction Control Engine temperature, dis‐ Folding back rear seat back‐
DTC 116 play 85 rests 149
Entering a car wash 220
238
Fold-out position, windshield GREEN tip 167 I

wipers 70 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
Foot brake 159 proved 227 Ice warning, see External tem‐
Front airbags 99 Ground clearance 160 perature warning 80
Front-end collision warning Icy roads, see External tem‐
with City Braking func‐ H perature warning 80
tion 109 Identification marks, tires 184
Front fog lights 97 Halogen headlights 204 Identification number, see ve‐
Front-seat passenger airbags, Handbrake, refer to parking hicle identification num‐
automatic deactivation 101 brake 66 ber 10
Front-seat passenger airbags, Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Ignition key, see Remote con‐
indicator lamp 101 nating code 144 trol 34
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 106 Hazard warning flashers 214 Ignition off 62
Fuel 176 Head airbag 99 Ignition on 62
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlight control, auto‐ Illuminated ring, central in‐
age fuel consumption 85 matic 95 strument cluster 88
Fuel filler flap 174 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Indication of a flat
Fuel gauge 80 ture 95 tire 103, 106
Fuel lid 174 Headlight flasher 67 Indicator lamp, see Check
Fuel quality 176 Headlight glass 204 Control 76
Fuel recommendation 176 Headlights, care 221 Individual air distribu‐
Fuel, tank capacity 230 Head restraints 49 tion 137, 140
Fuse 213 Head restraints, front 53 Individual settings, see Per‐
Head restraints, rear 54 sonal Profile 36
G Head-up Display 89 Inflation pressure, tires 178
Head-Up Display, Shift point Inflation pressure warning,
Garage door opener, see Uni‐ indicator 91 tires 106
versal Integrated Remote Head-up Display, sport dis‐ Info display, refer to On-Board
Control 143 plays 91 computer 84
Gasoline 176 Head-up Display, standard Information 6
Gear change, Steptronic trans‐ view 90 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
mission 71 Heavy cargo, stowing 162 tor TPM 103
Gear shift indicator 82 High-beam Assistant 96 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
General driving notes 158 High beams 67 FTM 106
Glare shield 147 High beams/low beams, see Instrument cluster 75
Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ High-beam Assistant 96 Instrument cluster, electronic
amic glass sunroof 46 Hills 160 displays 76
Glove compartment 151 Hill start assistant, see Drive- Instrument lighting 97
GREEN mode 165 off assistant 118 Integrated key 34
GREEN mode, bonus Holder for beverages 152 Integrated Owner's Manual in
range 167 Homepage 6 the vehicle 29
GREEN mode driving style Hood 194 Intelligent Safety 108
analysis 169 Horn 14 Intensity, AUTO program 139
GREEN mode indicator 165 Hot exhaust system 159 Interior equipment 143
GREEN - program, driving dy‐ HUD Head-up Display 89 Interior lights 98
namics 117 Hydroplaning 159
239
Interior lights during unlock‐ Lashing eyes, securing Maintenance require‐

ing 37 cargo 162 ments 200
Interior lights with the vehicle LATCH child restraint sys‐ Maintenance, service require‐
locked 38 tem 60 ments 81
Interior motion sensor 44 Launch Control 74 Maintenance system,
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Leather, care 221 MINI 200
matic dimming feature 56 LED bug light 204 Make-up mirror 147
Interior rearview mirror, com‐ LED headlights 204 Malfunction displays, see
pass 145 LED ring, central instrument Check Control 76
Interior rearview mirror, man‐ cluster 88 Manual air distribu‐
ually dimmable 56 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ tion 137, 140
Internet site 6 odes 203 Manual air flow 137, 140
Interval display, service re‐ Letters and numbers, enter‐ Manual mode, transmis‐
quirements 81 ing 25 sion 72
Interval mode 68 Light 94 Manual operation, door
Light-alloy wheels, care 222 lock 39
J Light-emitting diodes, Manual operation, exterior
LEDs 203 mirrors 55
Jacking points for the vehicle Lighter 147 Manual operation, fuel filler
jack 210 Lighting 94 flap 174
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Lights and bulbs 203 Manual operation, Park Dis‐
sion 71 Light switch 94 tance Control PDC 128
Jump-starting 214 Load 162 Manual operation, rearview
Loading 161 camera 130
K Lock, door 39 Manual transmission 71
Locking/unlocking via door Manufacturer of the MINI 7
Key/remote control 34 lock 39 Marking, run-flat tires 187
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Locking/unlocking with re‐ Master key, see Remote con‐
cess 41 mote control 37 trol 34
Key Memory, see Personal Locking, automatic 43 Maximum cooling 139
Profile 36 Locking, settings 42 Maximum speed, display 82
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Lock, power window 46 Maximum speed, winter
mission 71 Locks, doors, and windows 61 tires 187
Knee airbag 100 Low beams 94 Measurement, units of 88
Low beams, automatic, see Medical kit 214
L High-beam Assistant 96 Menu in instrument cluster 84
Lower back support, mechani‐ Menus, refer to onboard mon‐
Label on recommended cal 50 itor operating concept 20
tires 186 Luggage rack, refer to Roof- Messages, see Check Con‐
Lamp replacement 203 mounted luggage rack 162 trol 76
Lamp replacement, front 204 Lumbar support, mechani‐ Microfilter 138, 141
Lamp replacement, rear 206 cal 50 MID - program, driving dy‐
Lamp replacement, side 209 namics 117
Language on Control Dis‐ M MINI Connected, refer to
play 88 Integrated Owner's Manual
Maintenance 200
240
MINI maintenance sys‐ Oil, adding 196 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
tem 200 Oil additives 197 era 130
MINIMALISM Analyser 169 Oil change 197 PDC Park Distance Con‐
MINIMALISM info 168 Oil change interval, service re‐ trol 126
Minimum tread, tires 185 quirements 81 Pedestrian warning with city
Mirrors 55 Oil filler neck 196 braking function 112
Mobile communication devi‐ Oil types, alternative 197 Performance Control 116
ces in the vehicle 159 Oil types, suitable 197 Personal Profile 36
Mobility System 188 Old batteries, disposal 213 Phone, refer to Integrated
Mode, GREEN Mode 165 On-board computer 84 Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer On-board computer, refer to Pinch protection system, glass
to Own Safety 7 On-board computer 84 sunroof 47
Moisture in headlight 204 Onboard Diagnostics Pinch protection system, win‐
Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ OBD 201 dows 45
play 18 Onboard monitor 18 Plastic, care 222
Mounting of child restraint Onboard monitor operating PostCrash 114
systems 59 concept 18 Power failure 213
Multifunction steering wheel, Onboard vehicle tool kit 202 Power windows 44
buttons 14 Opening/closing via door Prescribed engine oil
Multimedia, refer to lock 39 types 197
Integrated Owner's Manual Opening/closing with remote Pressure, tire air pressure 178
control 37 Pressure warning, tires 106
N Operating menus, onboard Profile, see Personal Pro‐
monitor 18 file 36
Navigation, refer to Integrated Optional equipment, standard Protective function, glass sun‐
Owner's Manual equipment 6 roof 47
Neck restraints, front, see Outside air, refer to Automatic Protective function, win‐
Head restraints 53 recirculated-air control 140 dows 45
Neck restraints, rear, see Own safety 7 Push-and-turn switch, see
Head restraints 54 Controller 19
New wheels and tires 186 P
Nylon rope for tow-starting/ R
towing 217 Paint, vehicle 221
Panoramic glass sunroof 46 Radiator fluid 198
O Parallel parking assistant 132 Radio-operated key, see Re‐
Park Distance Control mote control 34
OBD Onboard Diagnos‐ PDC 126 Radio ready state 62
tics 201 Parked-car ventilation 141 Radio, refer to Integrated
Obstacle marking, rearview Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Owner's Manual
camera 131 tion 160 Rain sensor 68
Octane rating, see Recom‐ Parking aid, see PDC 126 Rear fog lights 97
mended fuel grade 176 Parking assistant 132 Rear lights 206
Odometer 80 Parking brake 66 Rear luggage rack 163
Office, refer to Integrated Parking lights 94 Rearview camera 129
Owner's Manual Passenger side mirror, tilting Rearview mirror 55
Oil 195 downward 55
241
Rear window de‐ RSC Run Flat System Compo‐ Shift paddles on the steering
froster 138, 140 nent, see Run-flat tires 187 wheel 73
Recirculated-air filter 141 Rubber components, Shift point indicator, Head-Up
Recirculated-air care 222 Display 91
mode 137, 140 Run-flat tires 187 Side airbag 99
Recommended fuel Signaling, horn 14
grade 176 S Signals when unlocking 43
Recommended tire Sitting safely 49
brands 186 Safe braking 159 Size 226
Refueling 174 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Slide/tilt glass roof 46
Remaining range 81 er's seat and front passenger Snow chains 191
Remote control/key 34 seat 52 Socket 147
Remote control, blocking 35 Safety belts 51 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐
Remote control, malfunc‐ Safety belts, care 222 nostics 201
tion 38 Safety switch, windows 46 Spare fuse 213
Remote control, replacing the Safety systems, airbags 99 Spare tire, refer to Emergency
battery 34 Saving fuel 164 wheel 210
Remote control, univer‐ Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Speed, average 85
sal 143 play 18 Speed limit detection, on-
Replacement fuse 213 Screwdriver 202 board computer 85
Replacing parts 202 Screw thread for tow fit‐ Speed limiter, display 82
Replacing the battery, remote ting 218 Speed Limit Information 82
control 34 Sealant 188 Speed warning 87
Replacing wheels/tires 186 Seat belts, see Safety belts 51 Split screen 23
Reporting safety malfunc‐ Seat heating, front 51 Sport displays 86
tions 10 Seating position for chil‐ Sport displays, Head-up Dis‐
RES CNCL button, see camera- dren 58 play 91
based cruise control 119 Seats 49 Sport instruments, cockpit 92
RES CNCL button, see Cruise Selection list in instrument SPORT program, Dynamic
control 124 cluster 84 Driving Control 117
Reserve warning, see Selector lever, Steptronic Sport program, transmis‐
Range 81 transmission 71 sion 72
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Sensors, care 223 Stability control systems 115
TPM 103 Service and warranty 8 Standard view, Head-up Dis‐
Retaining straps, securing Service requirements, Condi‐ play 90
cargo 162 tion Based Service CBS 200 Start/stop, automatic func‐
Retreaded tires 187 Service requirements, dis‐ tion 64
Roadside parking lights 95 play 81 Start/Stop button 62
RON recommended fuel SET button, see camera-based Start function during malfunc‐
grade 176 cruise control 119 tion 35
Roofliner 17 SET button, see Cruise con‐ Starting the engine 63
Roof load capacity 227 trol 124 Status control display,
Roof-mounted luggage Settings, locking/unlocking 42 tires 103
rack 162 Settings, mirrors 55 Status information, onboard
Rope for tow-starting/ Settings on Control Display 87 monitor 23
towing 217 Status of Owner's Manual 7
242
Steering wheel, adjusting 57 Tilt alarm sensor 44 Turn signal, side 209
Steptronic Sport transmission, Time of arrival 85 Turn signals, operation 67
refer to Steptronic transmis‐ Tire damage 186 Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐
sion 71 Tire identification marks 184 placement 206
Steptronic transmission 71 Tire inflation pressure 178
Stopping the engine 63 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ U
Storage compartments 151 tor, refer to FTM 106
Storage, tires 187 Tire Pressure Monitor Unintentional alarm 44
Storing the vehicle 223 TPM 102 Units of measurement 88
Suitable engine oil types 197 Tires, changing 186 Universal remote control 143
Summer tires, tread 185 Tire sealant 188 Unlock button, Steptronic
Sun visor 147 Tires, everything on wheels transmission 72
Supplementary text mes‐ and tires 178 Unlocking/locking via door
sages 79 Tires, run-flat tires 187 lock 39
Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ Tire tread 185 Unlocking/locking with re‐
ing 117 Tone, refer to Integrated mote control 37
Switch-on times, parked-car Owner's Manual Unlocking, settings 42
ventilation 141 Tools 202 Updates made after the edito‐
Switch, see Cockpit 14 Total vehicle weight 227 rial deadline 7
Symbols 6 Touchpad 21 Upholstery care 222
Symbols in the status field 23 Tow fitting 218 USB interface 148
Towing 216
T Tow-starting 216 V
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Tachometer 80 tor 102 Vanity mirror 147
Tailgate 40 Traction control 116 Vehicle battery 212
Tailgate via remote control 38 TRACTION drive mode, driving Vehicle battery, replacing 212
Tail lights 206 dynamics 116 Vehicle, break-in 158
Technical changes, refer to Transmission lock, releasing Vehicle care 221
Own Safety 7 manually 73 Vehicle features and op‐
Technical data 226 Transmission, manual trans‐ tions 6
Temperature, air condi‐ mission 71 Vehicle identification num‐
tioner 137 Transmission, see Steptronic ber 10
Temperature, automatic cli‐ transmission 71 Vehicle jack 210
mate control 139 Transporting children Vehicle paint 221
Temperature display for exter‐ safely 58 Vehicle storage 223
nal temperature 80 Tread, tires 185 Vehicle wash 220
Temperature, engine 85 Triple turn signal activa‐ Ventilation 141
Tempomat, see camera-based tion 67 Ventilation, refer to Parked-
cruise control 119 Trip odometer 80 car ventilation 141
Terminal, starting aid 215 Trip on-board computer 86 VIN, see vehicle identification
Text messages, supplemen‐ Trip recorder, see Trip odome‐ number 10
tary 79 ter 80 Voice activation system 26
Theft alarm system, see Alarm Turning circle lines, rearview
system 43 camera 131
Thigh support 50 Turn signal, front 204
243
W
Warning and indicator lamps,
see Check Control 76
Warning displays, see Check
Control 76
Warning messages, see Check
Control 76
Warning triangle 214
Warranty 7
Washer fluid 70
Washing, vehicle 220
Water on roads 159
Weights 227
Welcome lamps during un‐
locking 37
Welcome lights 95
Wheels, changing 186
Wheels, everything on wheels
and tires 178
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
FTM 106
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 102
Window defroster,
rear 138, 140
Windows, powered 44
Windshield cleaning sys‐
tem 68
Windshield de‐
froster 138, 140
Windshield washer fluid 70
Windshield wipers, fold-out
position 70
Windshield wipers, see wiper
system 68
Winter storage, care 223
Winter tires, suitable tires 187
Winter tires, tread 185
Wiper blades, replacing 202
Wiper fluid 70
Wiper system 68
Wood, care 222
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 25
Wrench 202
244
*BL2963334006*
01 40 2 963 334 ue
DRIVE ME.

Mini.: Online Edition For Part No. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mini.: Online Edition For Part No. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mini.: Online Edition For Part No. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

User's manual for Navigation, 1. First action step.

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and op‐

Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification You can also obtain other information about

For Canadian customers

The vehicle identification number can also be

Reporting safety defects

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 963 334 - VI/15

All around the steering wheel

1 Power windows 44 Low beams 94

Camera-based cruise control on/ Cleaning windows 69

Cruise control on/off 124 Rear window wiper 69

Store speed 119, 124 Cleaning rear window 69

Pause, continue cruise con‐ 9 Steering wheel buttons, right

Confirm the selection 84

Move selection up 84

High beams, head‐ Increase volume

High-beam Assistant 96 Reduce volume

Roadside parking lights 95 10 Horn

All around the center console

1 Hazard warning system 214 Start/stop the engine and switch

Intelligent Safety 108 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐

2 Control Display 18 Head-up Display 89

All around the roofliner

1 Emergency Request 4 Ambient light 98

2 Indicator lamp, front-seat pass. 5 Glass sunroof 46

3 Reading lights 98 6 Interior lights 98

The concept 1 Control Display

Switch off 3. Move in four directions.

Press button Function

Controller with navigation system MENU Open the main menu.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The main menu is displayed.

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last listened to,

Changing between panels

3. Press the controller.

▷ The system recognizes capital and lower Example: setting the

Interactive map. Swipe into respective

Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the

Display menu. Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and

Status information Symbol Meaning

SIM card is missing.

Symbol Meaning Additional symbols

Satellite radio is switched on. Spoken instructions are turned off.

Incoming or outgoing call. General information

Check the SIM card. 1. Press button.

Selecting the display The function will work immediately. This